Yamaha Audio RX-V679BL de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha Audio

Model: RX-V679BL

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

English

AV Receiver

Owner’s Manual

Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.

En 2

CONTENTS

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

FEATURES 6

What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Useful applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Front panel (RX-V779) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Front panel (RX-V679) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Rear panel (RX-V779) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Rear panel (RX-V679) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

PREPARATIONS 16

General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . 32

Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

7 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Connecting an external power amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 36

Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) (RX-V779 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

PLAYBACK 53

Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch

(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

En 3

Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources

(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

CONFIGURATIONS 94

Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders

(DSP Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

DSP Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 118

Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 120

ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

En 4

APPENDIX 124

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Ideal speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

En 5

Accessories

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

 Remote control  Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)

 AM antenna  FM antenna

*One of the above is supplied depending on the region of

purchase.

 YPAO microphone



CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)

 Easy Setup Guide

 Safety Brochure

Insert the batteries the right

way round.

Operating range of the remote control

• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range

shown below.

• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the RX-V779 (U.S.A.

model), unless otherwise specified.

• In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.

• (RX-V779 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only)

For information on how to control external devices with the remote control, refer to “Supplement for

Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.

• Some features are not available in certain regions.

• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.

• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.

• This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and

“iPhone” unless otherwise specified.

• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.

• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.

30° 30°

Within

6 m (20 ft)

(RX-V779) (RX-V679)

30° 30°

En 6

FEATURES

What you can do with the unit

AV receiver (the unit)

Speakers

BD/DVD player

HDMI Control

Audio/Video

TV remote control

Audio

HDMI Control

Audio

Audio/Video

Sequential operation of a TV,

AV receiver, and BD/DVD

player (HDMI Control)

. p.139

Change the input source

and favorite settings with

one touch (SCENE)

. p.54

Supports 2- to 7.1-channel (plus presence)

speaker system. Allows you to enjoy your favorite

acoustic spaces in various styles.

• Automatically optimizing the speaker

settings to suit your room (YPAO)

. p.36

• Reproducing stereo or multichannel

sounds with the sound fields like

actual movie theaters and concert halls

(CINEMA DSP)

. p.56

• Enjoying compressed music with

enhanced sound (Compressed Music

Enhancer)

. p.60

• Playing back music in multiple rooms

(multi-zone)

. p.82

iPod/iPhone/

Bluetooth device

USB device

Audio

Network contents

Wide variety of supported content

•Bluetooth

. p.66

• iPod/iPhone

. p.67

•USB

. p.70

• Media server (PC/NAS)

. p.73

• Internet radio

. p.77

•AirPlay

. p.80

4K Ultra HD signals and

HDCP 2.2 supported

Control

En 7

Full of useful functions!

❑ Connecting various devices (p.27)

A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks

on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as

BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),

game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.

❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound

with a single HDMI cable connection

(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.25)

When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one

HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio

input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control

signals.

❑

Various wireless connection methods (

p.44

)

The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to

connect to your wireless router (access point) without a

network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct

enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly

without router.

❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.56)

Connecting presence speakers allows you to create a

natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own room

(CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no presence speakers

are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)

function produces 3D surround sound. In addition, the

unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)

using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to

the rear sound field even when no surround back

speakers are connected.

❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed

in front (p.58)

If you have surround speakers but there is no space to

place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in

the front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5

speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT).

❑ Low power consumption (p.117)

The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the

unit’s power consumption.

HDMI Control

TV audio

Video from

external device

Wi-Fi or

Wireless Direct

VSBS

Useful tips

The combination of video/audio input jacks does not

match an external device...

Use “Audio In” in the “Input” menu to change the

combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches

the output jack(s) of your external device (

p.28

Video and audio are not synchronized...

Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay

between video and audio output (p.107).

I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...

Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the

output destination of signals input into the unit (p.111).

Your TV speakers may be selected as an output

destination.

I want to get more bass sounds…

Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy

enhanced bass sounds (p.93).

I want to change the on-screen menu language...

Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a

language from English, Japanese, French, German,

Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.35).

I want to update the firmware...

Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to

update the unit’s firmware (p.122). If the unit is

connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed

on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.123).

Many other settings are available that let you to

customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.

• Input settings (p.94)

• SCENE settings (p.97)

• Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.99)

• Various function settings (p.102)

• Information view (such as audio signal and video

signal) (p.118)

• System settings (p.120)

En 8

Useful applications

■ AV CONTROLLER

“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into

a Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network

products. This application provides you the flexibility to

control the available inputs, volume, mute, power

commands and playback source.

Functions

• Power on/off and volume adjustment

• Input, scene and sound mode selection

• DSP Parameter adjustment

• Playback control (including music selection for some

sources)

• For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or

Google Play.

■ AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet)

“AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you

with cable connections between AV receiver and source

devices as well as AV receiver setup. This application

guides you through the various settings such as

speaker connections, TV and video/audio device

connections and selecting the speaker system.

Functions

• Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio

devices)

• Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup

assistance with illustrations)

• Viewing owner’s manual

• For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or

Google Play.

En 9

Front panel (RX-V779)

1 MAIN ZONE z key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

2 Standby indicator

Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the

following conditions.

• HDMI Control is enabled (p.110)

• Standby Through is enabled (p.111)

• Network Standby is enabled (p.112)

• An iPod is being charged (p.67)

3 ZONE 2 key

Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.85).

4 ZONE CONTROL key

Changes the zone (main zone or the Zone2) that is controlled

by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.85).

5 INFO (WPS) key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.90).

Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push

button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.47).

6 MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.62).

7 PRESET keys

Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.62).

8 FM and AM keys

Switch between FM and AM (p.61).

9 Front display

Displays information (p.11).

0 Remote control sensor

Receives remote control signals (p.5).

A TUNING keys

Select the radio frequency (p.61).

B PURE DIRECT key

Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.60).

C INPUT knob

Selects an input source.

D PHONES jack

For connecting headphones.

E YPAO MIC jack

For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.36).

F TONE CONTROL key

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range

of output sounds (p.92).

G SCENE keys

Select the registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.54).

H PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.55).

I STRAIGHT key

Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.59).

J VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack

For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game

console (p.30).

K USB jack

For connecting a USB storage device (p.70) or an iPod

(p.67).

L VOLUME knob

Adjusts the volume.

Part names and functions

INFO (WPS)ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROL

MEMORY

PRESET

FM AM

TUNING

CONTROL

DVD

NET

RADIO

INPUT

SCENE

MAIN ZONE

PHONES

SILENT

CINEMA

(CONNECT)

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

HDMI IN

5V 1A

VIDEO

VOLU ME

AUX

TONE

PROGRAM

YPAO MIC

:9 B2 34561 78 A

EDHIJ KG

En 10

Front panel (RX-V679)

1 MAIN ZONE z key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

2 Standby indicator

Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the

following conditions.

• HDMI Control is enabled (p.110)

• Standby Through is enabled (p.111)

• Network Standby is enabled (p.112)

• An iPod is being charged (p.67)

3 YPAO MIC jack

For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.36).

4 ZONE 2 key

Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.85).

5 Remote control sensor

Receives remote control signals (p.5).

6 ZONE CONTROL key

Changes the zone (main zone or the Zone2) that is controlled

by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.85).

7 INFO (WPS) key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.90).

Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push

button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.47).

8 MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.62).

9 PRESET keys

Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.62).

0 FM and AM keys

Switch between FM and AM (p.61).

A Front display

Displays information (p.11).

B TUNING keys

Select the radio frequency (p.61).

C PURE DIRECT key

Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.60).

D PHONES jack

For connecting headphones.

E INPUT keys

Select an input source.

F TONE CONTROL key

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range

of output sounds (p.92).

G SCENE keys

Select the registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.54).

H PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.55).

I STRAIGHT key

Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.59).

J VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack

For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game

console (p.30).

K USB jack

For connecting a USB storage device (p.70) or an iPod

(p.67).

L VOLUME knob

Adjusts the volume.

INFO (WPS)ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROL

MEMORY

PRESET

FM AM

TUNING

CONTROL

DVD

NET

RADIO

SCENE

MAIN ZONE

PHONES

SILENT

CINEMA

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

VIDEO

VOLUME

AUX

TONE

PROGRAM

YPAO MIC

INPUT

HDMI IN

5V 1A

(CONNECT)

5A C3 46781 2 9:

FHIJ KEG

En 11

Front display (indicators)

1 ECO

Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.117).

2 HDMI

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

OUT1/OUT2 (RX-V779 only)

Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI

signal

OUT (RX-V679 only)

Lights up when HDMI signals are being output.

3 ENHANCER

Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60) is

working.

4 CINEMA DSP

Lights up when CINEMA DSP or CINEMA DSP 3D (p.56) is

working.

5 STEREO

Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

TUNED

Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station

signal.

6 Signal strength indicator

Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.44).

7 Bluetooth indicator

Lights up when the unit is connecting to a

Bluetooth

device

(p.66).

8 PA RT Y

Lights up when the unit is in the party mode (p.86).

9 SLEEP

Lights up when the sleep timer is on.

0 ZONE2

Lights up when audio output to Zone2 is enabled (p.85).

A MUTE

Blinks when audio is muted.

B Volume indicator

Indicates the current volume.

C VIRTUAL

Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual

Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.56), or the virtual

surround processing (p.58) is working.

D Cursor indicators

Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.

E Information display

Displays the current status (such as input name and sound

mode name). You can switch the information by pressing

INFO (p.90).

F ADAPTIVE DRC

Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.92) is working.

G Speaker indicators

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.

A Front speaker (L)

S Front speaker (R)

D Center speaker

F Surround speaker (L)

G Surround speaker (R)

H Surround back speaker (L)

J Surround back speaker (R)

K Surround back speaker

B Presence speaker (L)

N Presence speaker (R)

L Subwoofer

L C R

FPRFPL

SBL SBRSB

VOL.

MUTE

ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL

ENHANCER

TUNEDSTEREO

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

OUT 1

2 C34 87 9 A1 :6B5

D DE

F G

En 12

Rear panel (RX-V779)

1 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that

allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another

room (p.84).

2 TRIGGER OUT jack

For connecting to a device that supports the trigger function

(p.33).

3 HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks

For connecting to HDMI-compatible TVs and outputting

video/audio signals (p.25). When using ARC, TV audio signal

can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

4 ANTENNA jacks

For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.31).

5 HDMI 1–5 jacks

For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.27).

6 Wireless antenna

For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.44).

7 NETWORK jack

For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.32).

8 SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting to speakers (p.21).

9 VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(General model only)

Selects the switch position according to your local voltage

(p.34).

0 Power cable

For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.34).

A PHONO jacks

(Except for U.S.A. and Canada models)

For connecting to a turntable (p.30).

B AUDIO 1–2 jacks

For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting

audio signals (p.30).

C AV 1–6 jacks

For connecting to video/audio playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.27).

D ZONE2 OUT jacks

For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and

for outputting audio (p.83).

E MONITOR OUT jacks

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For connecting to a TV that supports component video and

outputting video signals (p.25).

VIDEO jack

For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and

outputting video signals (p.26).

F PRE OUT jacks

For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or to an

external power amplifier (p.33).

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VIDEO

AV4

AV3

AV2

AV 1

(TV)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDMI 4

HDMI 5

HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2

ARC

ANTENNA

SURROUND CENTER

CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2

FRONT

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

SPEAKERS

AV 5

VIDEO

AV 6

ZONE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SUR. BACK SURROUND

PRE OUT

CENTER FRONT

SINGLE

ZONE 2

NETWORK

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

(

NET

)

12V

OUT

0.1A

ZONE2/F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

(

RADIO

)

WIRELESS

HDCP2.2

B F

51 3 7

9 0

* The area around the video/audio output jacks is

marked in white on the actual product to

prevent improper connections.

(U.S.A. model)

En 13

Rear panel (RX-V679)

1 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that

allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another

room (p.84).

2 TRIGGER OUT jack

For connecting to a device that supports the trigger function

(p.33).

3 HDMI OUT jack

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (p.25). When using ARC, TV audio signal

can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack.

4 ANTENNA jacks

For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.31).

5 HDMI 1–5 jacks

For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.27).

6 Wireless antenna

For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.44).

7 NETWORK jack

For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.32).

8 SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting to speakers (p.21).

9 VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(General model only)

Selects the switch position according to your local voltage

(p.34).

0 Power cable

For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.34).

A AUDIO 1–2 jacks

For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting

audio signals (p.30).

B AV 1–6 jacks

For connecting to video/audio playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.27).

C ZONE2 OUT jacks

For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and

for outputting audio (p.83).

D MONITOR OUT jacks

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For connecting to a TV that supports component video and

outputting video signals (p.25).

VIDEO jack

For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and

outputting video signals (p.26).

E SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1–2 jacks

For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.33).

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VIDEO

AV4

AV3

AV2

AV 1

(TV)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDMI 4

HDMI 5

HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2

ARC

ANTENNA

SURROUND CENTER

CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2

FRONT

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

SPEAKERS

AV 5

VIDEO

AV 6

ZONE OUT

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

ZONE 2

NETWORK

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

(

NET

)

12V

OUT

0.1A

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

(

RADIO

)

WIRELESS

ZONE2/F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

HDCP2.2

51 3 7

9 :

4 6

* The area around the video/audio output jacks is

marked in white on the actual product to prevent

improper connections.

(U.S.A. model)

En 14

Remote control

1 Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

2 z (receiver power) key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

3 Input selection keys

Select an input source for playback.

HDMI 1–5 HDMI 1–5 jacks

V-AUX VIDEO AUX jack (on the front panel)

AV 1–6 AV 1–6 jacks

AUDIO AUDIO 1–2 jacks (press repeatedly to select

“AUDIO1” or “AUDIO2”)

TUNER FM/AM radio

BLUETOOTH

Bluetooth

connection

(the unit as a

Bluetooth

receiver)

USB USB jack (on the front panel)

NET NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select

a desired network source)

PHONO

(RX-V779 [except for U.S.A. and Canada models])

PHONO jacks

4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch

Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by

the remote control (p.85).

5 SCENE keys

Select the registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.54).

6 PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program (p.55).

7 External device operation keys

Displays menus for the HDMI Control-compatible playback

device (p.139).

8 ON SCREEN key

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

9 Menu operation keys

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

0 MODE key

Switches the iPod operation modes (p.69).

A Radio keys

Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the

input source (p.61).

BAND Switches between FM and AM radio.

PRESET Select a preset station.

TUNING Select the radio frequency.

External device operation keys

Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is

selected as the input source, or control playback of the

HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.139).

B Sound mode keys

Select a sound mode (p.55).

C INFO key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.90).

D SLEEP key

Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a

specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press

repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).

E Numeric keys

Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.

MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.62).

ENT

MEMORY

6 87

123 4

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

123 4

AUDIO

TUNER

3 4

SUR. DECODE

(RX-V779 U.S.A. model)

En 15

F HDMI OUT key

(RX-V779)

Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output

(p.53).

(RX-V679)

Enables/disables video/audio output from the HDMI OUT

jack (p.53).

G PA RT Y k ey

Turns on/off the party mode (p.86).

H VOLUME keys

Adjust the volume.

I MUTE key

Mutes the audio output.

J OPTION key

Displays the option menu (p.91).

K DISPLAY key

Displays status information on the TV (p.90).

• (RX-V779 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only)

For information on the keys other than those above, refer to

“Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.

ENT

MEMORY

6 87

123 4

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

123 4

AUDIO

TUNER

3 4

SUR. DECODE

(RX-V779 U.S.A. model)

En 16

PREPARATIONS

This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!

General setup procedure

1 Placing speakers (p.17)

Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room.

2 Connecting speakers (p.21)

Connect the speakers to the unit.

3 Connecting a TV (p.25)

Connect a TV to the unit.

4 Connecting playback devices (p.27)

Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.

5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.31)

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Connecting a network cable or preparing

the wireless antenna (p.32)

Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for

establishing a wireless network connection.

7 Connecting other devices (p.33)

Connect external devices, such as an external power amplifier (RX-V779 only) and a device compatible

with the trigger function.

8 Connecting the power cable (p.34)

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

Selecting an on-screen menu language

(p.35)

Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).

Optimizing the speaker settings

automatically (YPAO) (p.36)

Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room

(YPAO).

Connecting to a network device wirelessly

(p.44)

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless

connection.

En 17

Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the

representative speaker layout examples.

If you use five speakers in the front side, use two of them as front surround speakers (*1) or presence speakers (*2). We recommend using them as front surround speakers for

enjoying unprocessed playback (p.59) or presence speakers for enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (p.56).

• For information on the ideal speaker layout, see “Ideal speaker layout” (p.133).

• If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers or presence speakers.

To reinforce the rear left/right sounds, use them as surround back speakers.

To create a natural 3-dimensional sound field, use them as presence speakers.

• Two subwoofers connected to the unit output the same sounds.

1 Placing speakers

Caution

• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.20).

Speaker type Abbr. Function

Speaker system (the number of channels)

7.1+2 7.1 7.1 6.1 5.1

Front

5.1

4.1 3.1 2.1

Front (L) 1

Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).

● ●●●● ● ●●●

Front (R) 2 ● ●●●● ● ●●●

Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). ●●●●●● ●

Surround (L) 4

Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel

sounds when no surround back speakers are connected.

●●●●●

*

●

Surround (R) 5 ●●●●●

*

●

Surround back (L) 6

Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.

●●

Surround back (R) 7 ●●

Surround back 8 Produces sounds mixed from surround back left/right channel sounds. ●

Presence (L) E

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP 3D (p.56), the presence speakers

create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your room.

●●

*

Presence (R) R ●●

*

Subwoofer 9

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels.

This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.

● ●●●● ● ●●●

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 18

7.1+2-channel system

• The surround back speakers and presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit

automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.56).

7.1-channel system (using presence speakers)

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural

3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)

using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This

system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.

7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers)

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to

enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.

6.1-channel system

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to

enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speaker.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 19

5.1-channel system

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual

Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to

the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for

7.1-channel contents.

Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers)

Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual

surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual

CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (

p.105

) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”.

• You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).

Front 5.1-channel system (using presence speakers)

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural

3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front

speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).

4.1-channel system

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 20

2.1-channel system

Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround

speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound

(Virtual CINEMA DSP).

• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.

■ Setting the speaker impedance

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a

6-ohm speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case,

you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall

outlet.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press

MAIN ZONE z.

Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display.

Press STRAIGHT to select “6  MIN”.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the

power cable from the AC wall outlet.

You are now ready to connect the speakers.

MAIN ZONE z

STRAIGHT

SPIMP.8MIN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 21

Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.

The following diagrams provide connections for 7.1+2-,

7.1-, and 6.1-channel systems as examples. For other

systems, connect speakers while referring to the

connection diagram for the 6.1-channel system.

Cables required for connection

(commercially available)

Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)

Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)

7.1+2-channel system 7.1-channel system

(using surround back speakers)

2 Connecting speakers

Caution

• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn

off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch

one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts.

Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker

cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front

display when the unit is turned on.

• The illustrations of the unit (rear) used in this section are of the

RX-V779.

–

SURROUND CENTER

CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2

FRONT

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

ZONE2/F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

The unit (rear)

SURROUND CENTER

CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2

FRONT

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

ZONE2/F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

The unit (rear)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 22

7.1-channel system

(using presence speakers)

6.1-channel system

■ Connecting speaker cables

Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting

the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and

the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are

colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to

the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.

a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from

the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of

the cable firmly together.

b Loosen the speaker terminal.

c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side

(upper right or bottom left) of the terminal.

d Tighten the terminal.

Using a banana plug

(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)

a Tighten the speaker terminal.

b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.

SURROUND CENTER

CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2

FRONT

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

ZONE2/F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

The unit (rear)

SURROUND CENTER

CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2

FRONT

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

ZONE2/F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

When using only one surround back speaker, connect it

to the SINGLE jack (L side).

The unit (rear)

FRONT

+ (red)

- (black)

FRONT

Banana plug

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 23

Push-type speaker terminals

(RX-V679 only)

a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from

the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of

the cable firmly together.

b Press down the tab.

c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the hole in the

terminal.

d Release the tab.

■ Connecting the subwoofer

Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.

Connecting front speakers that

support bi-amp connections

When using front speakers that support bi-amp

connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks.

To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign”

(p.104) in the “Setup” menu to “5ch BI-AMP” after

connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

• The FRONT jacks and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks output the

same signals.

ONE 2/F.PRESENCE

TRA SP

+ (red)

- (black)

CENTER

FRONT

Audio pin cable

SURROUND CENTER

CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2

FRONT

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

ZONE2/F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

The unit (rear)

Caution

• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or

cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the

instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not

making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or

cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables.

• Surround back speakers cannot be used during bi-amp

connections.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 24

■ Video/audio jacks

❑ HDMI jacks

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single

jack. Use an HDMI cable.

• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using

a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality

degradation.

• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return

Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission

features.

• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.

■ Video jacks

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Transmit video signals separated into three

components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P

B),

and chrominance red (P

R). Use a component video

cable with three plugs.

❑ VIDEO jacks

Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.

■ Audio jacks

❑ OPTICAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical

cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before

using the cable.

❑ COAXIAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial

cable.

❑ AUDIO jacks

Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin

cable (RCA cable).

Input/output jacks and cables

HDCP2.2

(BD/DVD)

HDMI cable

MONITOR OUT

Component video cable

MONITOR OUT

Video pin cable

OPTICAL

Digital optical cable

COAXIAL

Digital coaxial cable

Stereo pin cable

En 25

Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.

You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.

To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI

cable.

■ HDMI connection

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.

• (RX-V779 only)

You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.26).

• You do not make a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:

– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)

– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box

• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s

power and volume with the TV’s remote control.

To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For

details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.139).

■ Component/composite video connection

When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to

the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.

When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the

MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.

• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be

output to the TV.

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

• If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable

connection between the TV and the unit.

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)

3 Connecting a TV

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a

single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VIDEO

AV4

AV3

AV2

AV 1

(TV)

MONIT

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDCP2.2

ARC

ANTENNA

AV 5

VIDEO

AV 6

ZONE OUT

SUR. B

SIN

ZONE 2

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

(

RADIO

)

OPTICAL

HDMI

HDCP2.2

OUT

ARC

HDMI

OPTICAL

AV4

(TV)

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT jack

AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack

Audio output

(digital optical)

HDMI input

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VIDEO

AV4

AV3

AV2

AV 1

(TV)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDCP2.2

HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2

ARC

ANTENNA

AV 5

VIDEO

AV 6

ZONE OUT

SUR. BACK SURROUND

SINGLE

ZONE 2

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

(

RADIO

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OPTICAL

AV4

(TV)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO)

jacks

Video input

(component video)

AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack

Audio output

(digital optical)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 26

❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)

■ Connecting another TV or a projector

(RX-V779 only)

The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit

with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching

videos with the remote control (p.53).

• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VIDEO

AV4

AV3

AV2

AV 1

(TV)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDCP2.2

HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2

ARC

ANTENNA

AV 5

VIDEO

AV 6

ZONE OUT

SUR. BACK SURROUND

SINGLE

ZONE 2

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

(

RADIO

)

VIDEO

OPTICAL

AV4

(TV)

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT

(VIDEO) jack

Video input

(composite video)

AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack

Audio output

(digital optical)

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VIDEO

AV4

AV3

AV2

AV 1

(TV)

MONIT

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDCP2.2

ARC

ANTENNA

AV 5

VIDEO

AV 6

ZONE OUT

SUR. B

SIN

ZONE 2

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

(

RADIO

)

HDMI

OUT

ARC

HDMI

HDCP2.2

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 2 jack

HDMI input

Projector

TV (already connected)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 27

The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow

you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect

an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.

– Connecting an iPod (p.67)

– Connecting a USB storage device (p.70)

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)

Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game

consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video

device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI

connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.

• If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change

its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.28).

■ HDMI connection

Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.

If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–5, the video/audio played back on

the video device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–5 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the

unit (p.25).

• If your video device supports HDCP 2.2, connect the device to the HDMI 1–3 jacks.

■ Component video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable

(digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on

the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the

video device will be output from the unit.

• The component video signals (other than 480i/576i signals) input to AV 1–2 jacks of the unit can be output

from the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks only. To watch those videos, you need to connect

your TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit (p.25). For details, refer to “Video

signal flow” (p.138).

4 Connecting playback devices

O 1

AUDI O 2

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDMI 4

HDMI 5

HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2

ARC

ANTENNA

SURROUND CENTER

CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE

SPEAKERS

AV 5

VIDEO

AV 6

ZONE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SUR. BACK SURROUND

PRE OUT

CENTER FRONT

SINGLE

ZONE 2

T VIDEO

(

RADIO

)

WIRELESS

HDMI

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDMI 4

HDMI 5

HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI output

Video device

HDMI 1–5 jacks

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Component video

Digital optical AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VIDEO

AV4

AV3

AV2

AV 1

(TV)

MONIT

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDCP2.2

ARC

ANTENNA

AV 5

VIDEO

AV 6

ZONE OUT

SUR. B

SIN

ZONE 2

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

(

RADIO

)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OPTICAL

AV2

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

The unit

(rear)

AV 1–2

(COMPONENT VIDEO)

jacks

Video output

(component video)

Video device

Audio output

(digital optical or digital coaxial)

AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or

AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 28

■ Composite video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital

coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)

depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–6, the video/audio played back on the

video device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack

(p.25) or to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack (p.26) of the unit. For details, refer to “Video signal flow”

(p.138).

■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks

If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your

video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You

can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks.

❑ Necessary setting

For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and

AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows.

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Composite video

Digital coaxial AV 3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 5–6 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VIDEO

AV4

AV3

AV2

AV 1

(TV)

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDCP2.2

ARC

ANTENNA

AV 5

VIDEO

AV 6

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

(

RADIO

)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VIDEO

The unit (rear)

AV 3–6 (VIDEO)

jack

Video output

(composite video)

Video device

Audio output

(either digital optical,

digital coaxial, or analog stereo)

Any of AV 3 (COAXIAL) jack,

AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack,

AV 5–6 (AUDIO) jacks

Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio Video Audio

HDMI

Digital optical HDMI 1–5

AV 1 (OPTICAL)

AV 4 (OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial HDMI 1–5 AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)

Analog stereo HDMI 1–5

AV 5–6 (AUDIO)

AUDIO 1–2

Component video Analog stereo

AV 1–2

(COMPONENT

VIDEO)

AV 5–6 (AUDIO)

AUDIO 1–2

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VIDEO

AV4

AV3

AV2

AV 1

(TV)

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDCP2.2

ARC

ANTENNA

AV 5

VIDEO

AV 6

ZONE

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

(

RADIO

)

AV 5

AUDIO

AV2

COMPONENT

VIDEO

AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO)

jacks

Video output

(component video)

AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks

Video device

Audio output

(analog stereo)

The unit (rear)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 29

• The following operation is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback

devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit.

Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input

source.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AV2” (video input jack to be

used) and press the cursor key (q).

Use the cursor keys to select “Audio In” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “AV5” (audio input jack to be used).

Press ON SCREEN.

This completes the necessary settings.

If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back

on the video device will be output from the unit.

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

DISPLA

RETURN

OPTION

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

NET

BLUETOOTH

USB

V-AUX

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOT

V-AUX

AUDIO

TUNER

ON SCREEN

ENTER

AV 2

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 30

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)

Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.

Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the

following connections.

* RX-V779 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models)

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–6, AUDIO or PHONO*, the audio played

back on the audio device will be output from the unit.

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel

Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.

Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see

“Connecting an iPod” (p.67) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.70).

Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on

the unit.

❑ HDMI connection

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the

unit with an HDMI cable.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played

back on the device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT

jack of the unit (p.25).

• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that match the output jacks on your device.

Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit

Digital optical

AV 1 (OPTICAL)

AV 4 (OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)

Analog stereo

AV 5–6 (AUDIO)

AUDIO 1–2

Turntable (PHONO) PHONO*

When connecting a turntable

(RX-V779 only [except for U.S.A. and Canada models])

• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a

low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.

• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VIDEO

AV4

AV3

AV2

AV 1

(TV)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDMI 4

HDCP2.2

HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2

ARC

ANTENNA

AV 5

VIDEO

AV 6

ZONE OUT

SUR. BACK SURROUND

PRE OU

CENTER

SINGLE

ZONE 2

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

(

RADIO

)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

PHONO

GND

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

Audio output

(either digital optical,

digital coaxial, or analog stereo)

AV 1–6 jacks

AUDIO 1–2 jacks

The unit

(rear)

Audio device

PHONO jacks*

Audio output (PHONO)

Turntable

Ground lead

CONTROL

DVD

NET

RADIO

PHONES

SILENT

CINEMA

(CONNECT)

STRAIGHT

HDMI IN

5V 1A

VIDEO

AUX

TONE

PROGRAM

YPAO MIC

HDMI

Game console

Camcorder

The unit (front)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 31

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.

Assembling and connecting the AM antenna

• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.

• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VIDEO

AV4

AV3

AV2

AV 1

(TV)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDMI 4

HDMI 5

HDCP2.2

HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2

ARC

ANTENNA

SURROUND CENTER

CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2

FRONT

SPEAKERS

VIDEO

NETWORK

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

(

NET

)

12V

OUT

0.1A

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

(

RADIO

)

WIRELESS

AM antennaFM antenna

The unit (rear)

Hold down Insert Release

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 32

Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless

antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.

You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and

Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

Connecting the network cable

Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5

or higher straight cable).

• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set

“Network Connection” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.

• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,

as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to

configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network

parameters manually (p.111).

• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in

“Network” (p.119) in the “Information” menu.

• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)

may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the

security software or firewall settings appropriately.

• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.

• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

Preparing the wireless antenna

If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up

straight.

For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see

“Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.44).

• Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.

6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna

CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGECLASSE2

SPEAKERS

NETWORK

(

NET

)

ZONE2/F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

WIRELESS

LAN

WAN

Network Attached Storage

(NAS)

Internet

Modem

Router

Network cable

The unit (rear)

Mobile device

(such as iPod touch

and iPhone)

WIRELESS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 33

Connecting an external power amplifier

(RX-V779 only)

When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker

output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit.

The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

1 SUR. BACK jacks

Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one external amplifier for the surround

back channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).

2 SURROUND jacks

Output surround channel sounds.

3 CENTER jack

Outputs center channel sounds.

4 FRONT jacks

Output front channel sounds.

5 SUBWOOFER1–2 jacks

For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier. When 2 subwoofers are connected, the same

sound is output from them.

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function

The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the

unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the

trigger function by connecting the external device to the TRIGGER OUT jack with a

monaural mini-jack cable.

• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu.

7 Connecting other devices

Caution

• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making

connections.

– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.

– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS

terminals.

– When using an external amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, do not connect other

devices (except the unit) to the amplifier.

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

I 1

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDMI 4

HDMI 5

2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2

ANTENNA

SURROUND CENTER

CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2

FRONT

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

SPEAKERS

AV 6

ZONE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SUR. BACK SURROUND

PRE OUT

CENTER FRONT

SINGLE

ZONE 2

NETWORK

(

NET

)

ZONE2/F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

(

RADIO

)

WIRELESS

1 2 3 4 5

The unit (rear)

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VIDEO

AV4

AV3

AV2

AV 1

(TV)

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDCP2.2

ARC

ANTENNA

AV 5

VIDEO

AV 6

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

(

RADIO

)

TRIGGER OUT

12V

0.1A

The unit (rear)

TRIGGER OUT jack

System

connector

jack

Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 34

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

8 Connecting the power cable

Before connecting the power cable (General model only)

Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.

Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.

• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC

wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a

potential fire hazard.

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

ZONE2/F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

220V

240V

110V

120V

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

The unit (rear)

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

CENTER

WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2

FRONT

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

SPEAKERS

NETWORK

(

NET

)

ZONE2/F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

To an AC wall outlet

The unit (rear)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 35

Select the desired on-screen menu language from English

(default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and

Chinese.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network

setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and

the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired

language.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

9 Selecting an on-screen menu language

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

OUT

OOT

MAIN

RADI

HDM

V-A

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

En 36

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function

detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to

your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the

speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic

parameters, to suit your room.

• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)

technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically

designed for acoustic perfection.

• Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.

– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.

– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.

– Keep the room as quiet as possible.

– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not

become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.

– Do not connect headphones.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network

setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If

the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to

maximum.

• If you are using bi-amp connection or Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp

Assign” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before

starting YPAO.

• If you want to use the surround speakers for the front 5.1-channel system

(Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.19), set “Layout (Surround)” (p.105) in the

“Setup” menu to “Front”.

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening

position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the

front panel.

• Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your

ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can

use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.

10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

VOLUME HIGH CUT

CROSSOVER/

MIN MAXMIN MAX

YPAO MIC

The unit (front)

YPAO

microphone

Ear height

YPAO MIC

jack

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

RETURN

ENTER

En 37

(RX-V679)

The following screen appears on the TV.

This completes the preparations.

See “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)”

(p.38) to start the measurement.

(RX-V779)

The following screen appears on the TV.

Proceed to Step 5.

• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting

the measurement.

• To configure the power amplifier assignment setting, press RETURN and

select “Manual Setup” (p.104).

(RX-V779 only) If desired, change the measuring

method (multi/single).

a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER.

b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.

Settings

• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to

enjoy surround sound in a wider space.

• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening

position you will be seated most frequently.

Yes

Select this option if you will have several listening

positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.

You can take measurements at up to 8 different

positions in the room. The speaker settings will be

optimized to suit the area defined by those positions

(multi measure).

No (default)

Select this option if your listening position will always be

fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The

speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position

(single measure).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

En 38

This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the

measurement.

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:

“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) (RX-V779

only)” (p.39)

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:

“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.38)

Measuring at one listening position

(single measure)

Follow the procedure below for measurement. It takes about

3 minutes to perform the measurement.

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement finishes.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)

appears, see “Error messages” (p.42) or “Warning messages” (p.43).

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see

“Checking the measurement results” (p.41).

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and

press ENTER.

a b

bac

Multi measure

(5 listening positions)

Multi measure

(2 listening positions + front/back)

Multi measure

(1 listening position + front/back/left/right)

Single measure

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

En 39

To save the measurement results, use the cursor

keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”

to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.

• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are

automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy

natural sounds even at low volume.

• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.92) in the

“Option” menu.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Measuring at multiple listening positions

(multi measure) (RX-V779 only)

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for

measurement. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening

positions.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,

see “Error messages” (p.42) or “Warning messages” (p.43).

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement at the first position finishes.

Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening

position and press ENTER.

Repeat Step 2 until measurements at all listening positions

(up to 8) have been taken.

Caution

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

En 40

When the measurements at the positions you want

to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to

select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.

When you have taken measurements at 8 listening

positions, the following screen appears automatically.

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see

“Checking the measurement results” (p.41).

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and

press ENTER.

To save the measurement result, use the cursor

keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”

to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.

• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are

automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy

natural sounds even at low volume.

• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.92) in the

“Option” menu.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Caution

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ENTER

Cursor keys

En 41

Checking the measurement results

You can check the YPAO measurement results.

After the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Result” and press ENTER.

• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.102) in the “Setup” menu,

which displays the previous measurement results.

The following screen appears.

1 Measurement result items

2 Measurement result details

3 The number of measured positions (when multi

measure is performed) * RX-V779 only

Use the cursor keys to select an item.

To finish checking the results and return to the

previous screen, press RETURN.

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments

When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not

suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings

and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.

In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto

Setup”, and then “Result” (p.101).

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and

press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Wiring

Polarity of each speaker

Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the

reverse polarity (+/-).

Size

Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the

subwoofer)

Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively.

Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively.

Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker

Level Output level adjustment for each speaker

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

En 42

Error messages

If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.

Error message Cause Remedy

E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.

E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the presence speakers cannot be detected.

E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.

When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the

on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.

E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud.

Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select

“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.

E-6: Check Sur.

Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround

speakers are connected.

Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen

instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.

E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

measurement again.

E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service

center.

E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.

E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact

the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 43

Warning messages

If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.

However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.

Warning message Cause Remedy

W-1: Out of Phase

A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity

(+/-).

Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.41) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by

“Reverse”.

If the speaker is connected incorrectly:

Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.

If the speaker is connected correctly:

Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are

connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.

W-2: Over Distance

A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening

position.

Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.41) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80

ft) of the listening position.

W-3: Level Error

There are significant volume differences between the

speakers.

Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the

subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as

possible.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 44

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a

wireless connection.

Selecting the connection method

Select a connection method according to your network environment.

■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).

You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS)

on the unit.

For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.45).

• You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection

(p.32) or Wireless Direct (p.51).

• If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless

router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other.

■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)

Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.

You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the

unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.

For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly

(Wireless Direct)” (p.51).

• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.32) or the

wireless network connection (p.45).

• When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.

– Internet radio

–Network services

– Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS)

• For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website.

11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly

The unit

Wireless router

Mobile device

(such as iPhone)

Internet

Modem

The unitMobile device

(such as iPhone)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 45

Connecting the unit to a wireless network

There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless

network.

Select a connection method according to your environment.

■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting

You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the

connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch).

Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a

wireless router.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to

the unit via HDMI.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network

Connection” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check

“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check

“Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.

Yes

Do you own iOS devices

(iPhone/iPod touch)?

Yes

A (p.45)

B (p.47)

Does your wireless router

(access point) have a WPS

button?

C (p.48)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

En 46

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the

desired connection method and select “NEXT”.

The following connection methods are available.

❑ Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly

If you select “Wireless (WAC)” as the connection method, perform

the network setting sharing operation on your iOS device. (The

following procedure is a setup example for iOS 8.)

On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay

speaker in the Wi-Fi screen.

Check the network currently selected and tap

“Next”.

When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically

connected to the selected network (access point).

Wireless (WAC)

You can apply the connection settings on the iOS

device to the unit using a wireless connection. For

details, see “Sharing the iOS device setting

wirelessly”.

(You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later.)

USB Cable

You can apply the connection settings on the iOS

device to the unit using a USB cable. For details,

see “Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB

cable”.

(You need iOS device with iOS 5 or later.)

The name of the unit

Tap here to start setup

The network currently selected

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ENTER

Cursor keys

En 47

❑ Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable

If you select “USB Cable” as the connection method, follow the

procedure below to share the iOS device setting with the unit.

Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable

the screen lock on the iOS device.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and

press ENTER.

Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS

device.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the TV screen.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ B: Using the WPS push button

configuration

You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the

WPS button.

• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router

(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3

seconds.

“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front

display.

Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access

point).

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the front display.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try

another connection method.

HDMI IN

5V 1A

VIDEO

AUX

The unit (front)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

En 48

■ C: Using other connection methods

If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push

button configuration method, follow the procedure below to

configure the wireless network settings.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to

the unit via HDMI.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network

Connection” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check

“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the

desired connection method and select “NEXT”.

The following connection methods are available.

WPS Button

You can set up a wireless connection with the

WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow

the instructions displayed on the TV screen.

Share Wi-Fi

Settings (iOS)

See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.45).

Access Point

Scan

You can set up a wireless connection by

searching for an access point. For details on

settings, see “Searching for an access point”

(p.49).

Manual Setting

You can set up a wireless connection by entering

the required information (such as SSID)

manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up

the wireless connection manually” (p.49).

PIN Code

You can set up a wireless connection by entering

the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router

(access point). The method is available if the

wireless router (access point) supports the WPS

PIN code method. For details on settings, see

“Using the PIN code” (p.50).

About WPS

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,

which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

En 49

❑ Searching for an access point

If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the

unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of

available access points appears on the TV screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the

desired access point and select “NEXT”.

The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the

security key and select “NEXT”.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”

and press ENTER to start the connection process.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the TV screen.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try

another connection method.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually

If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the

wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method

and security key for your network.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of

the access point and select “NEXT”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the

security method of the access point and select

“NEXT”.

Settings

None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

En 50

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the

security key and select “NEXT”.

If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available.

Proceed to Step 4.

If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or

10 or 26 hexadecimal digits.

If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character

string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”

and press ENTER to start the connection process.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the TV screen.

If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is

entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

❑ Using the PIN code

If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of

available access points appears on the TV screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the

desired access point and select “NEXT”.

The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.

Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router

(access point).

For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the

wireless router (access point).

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”

and press ENTER to start the connection process.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the TV screen.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try

another connection method.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

En 51

Connecting a mobile device to the unit

directly (Wireless Direct)

Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit

directly.

• Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not

strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless

devices connected to the unit without permission.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to

the unit via HDMI.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network

Connection” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check

“Wireless Direct” and select “OK”.

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the

desired security method and select “NEXT”.

Settings

None, WPA2-PSK (AES)

• If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the

communication is not encrypted.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

En 52

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the

security key and select “NEXT”.

If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available.

Proceed to Step 10.

Otherwise, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64

hexadecimal digits.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press

ENTER to save the setting.

The settings made appear on the TV screen.

The SSID and security key information is required for setup

of a mobile device.

Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.

For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the

instruction manual of the mobile device.

a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.

b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available

access points.

c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key

displayed in Step 10.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 53

PLAYBACK

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or

BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.61)

• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.66)

• Playing back iPod music (p.67)

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

(p.70)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p.73)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.77)

• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.80)

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.

• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE

CONTROL on the front panel (p.92).

On-screen input selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and

press ENTER.

Selecting an HDMI output jack

Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.

Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be

used for signal output changes.

(RX-V779 only)

• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.54).

• When “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest

resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For

example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p

TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)

Basic playback procedure

HDMI OUT 1+2

(RX-V779 only)

Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1

and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.

HDMI OUT 1

Output the signals at the HDMI OUT 1 (RX-V779) or

HDMI OUT (RX-V679) jack.

HDMI OUT 2

(RX-V779 only)

Output the signals at the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

HDMI OUT Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.

L C R

SBL SBR

SW SR

VOL.

HDMI OUT 1

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

VOLUME

MUTE

HDMI OUT

Cursor keys

Input selection keys

En 54

The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,

sound program, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI

output jack (RX-V779 only) with just one touch.

Press SCENE.

The input source and settings registered to the

corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on

automatically when it is in standby mode.

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.

Configuring scene assignments

Perform the following operations to prepare the

settings you want to assign to a scene.

• Select an input source (p.53)

• Select a sound program (p.55)

• Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60)

• (RX-V779 only)

Selecting an HDMI output jack (p.53)

Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET

Complete” appears on the front display.

• You can also configure scene assignments in the “Scene” menu (p.96).

• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external

device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify

the device type in “Device Control” (p.97) in the “Scene” menu.

• (RX-V779 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only)

To control your playback device after selecting a scene with the remote control of

the unit, change the external device assigned to the SCENE keys. For details,

refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” in the supplied CD-ROM.

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)

SCENE

Input HDMI 1 AV 4 NET RADIO TUNER

Sound

program

MOVIE

(Sci-Fi)

STRAIGHT

MUSIC

(7ch Stereo)

MUSIC

(7ch Stereo)

Compressed

Music

Enhancer

Off On On On

HDMI output

jack

(RX-V779 only)

HDMI OUT

1+2

HDMI OUT

1+2

HDMI OUT

1+2

HDMI OUT

1+2

DVD

NET

RADIO

L C R

SBL SBR

SW SR

VOL.

SET Complete

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

SCENE

En 55

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and

surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with

your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo

playback).

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies

• Press MOVIE repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing

video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.56).

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or

stereo playback

• Press MUSIC repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening

music sources or stereo playback (p.57).

❑ Selecting a surround decoder

• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from

2-channel sources (p.59).

❑ Switching to the straight decode mode

• Press STRAIGHT.

This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels

(p.59).

❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode

• Press PURE DIRECT.

This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the

electrical noise from other circuitry (p.60).

❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer

• Press ENHANCER.

This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth

and breadth (p.60).

On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround

decoder and press ENTER.

• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing

PROGRAM.

• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in

the “DSP Program” menu (p.98).

• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

• When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the

straight decode mode (p.59) is automatically selected.

• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the

speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.11) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in

the “Information” menu (p.118).

Selecting the sound mode

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

1 2 3

NIN

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

P-

MEN

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

1 2

AUDI

TUNER

MOVIE

MUSIC

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

ON SCREEN

ENTER

PROGRAM

Cursor keys

En 56

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP

technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual

movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound

fields.

• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.

• We recommend using presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic sound

fields. However, even when no presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence

Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields.

• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected,

the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of

depth to the rear sound field.

• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)

The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as

movies, TV programs, and games.

❑ MOVIE THEATER

L C R

SL SW SR

VOL.

Hall in Vienna

FPRFPL

“CINEMA DSP” lights up

Sound program category

Sound program

Standard

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling

without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,

such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the

ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful

reverberations from the left, right, and rear.

Spectacle

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie

productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the

cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing

everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the

latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of

cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear

separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and

adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but

puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,

powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth

creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation

of the sounds and the separation of the channels.

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of

movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The

reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects

and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not

impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for

long periods.

Mono Movie

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,

in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a

pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate

reverberation to the original audio.

En 57

❑ ENTERTAINMENT

■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback

(MUSIC)

The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.

You can also select stereo playback.

❑ CLASSICAL

❑ LIVE/CLUB

❑ STEREO

• CINEMA DSP 3D (p.56) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.58) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is

selected.

Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts

and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’

voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the

stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of

the fans in a suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting

games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player

feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater

concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music

Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This

program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction

of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of

scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music

Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as

if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere

thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence

sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround

sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

Hall in Munich

This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500

seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful

reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s

virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a

shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings

create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,

producing a very full, rich sound.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an

audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable

for courtly music and chamber music.

Cellar Club

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and

homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds

that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small

stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert

venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the

hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a

famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left

and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When

multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and

output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).

7ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back

multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and

then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.

En 58

■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers

(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no

surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround

technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the

well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using

presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.

• When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in

front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)

If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your

room, you can place them in the front (p.19) and enjoy multichannel surround sound

using Virtual CINEMA FRONT.

When “Layout (Surround)” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates

the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel

surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front.

• When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with

stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting

a sound program or a surround decoder.

En 59

Enjoying unprocessed playback

You can play back input sources without any sound field effect

processing.

■ Playing back in original channels

(straight decode)

When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces

stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as

CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for

multichannel sources.

Press STRAIGHT.

Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is

enabled or disabled.

• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround

back speakers are used, select a surround decoder (p.59)

• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual

CINEMA FRONT (p.58) works when multichannel source is played back.

■ Playing back 2-channel sources in

multichannel (surround decoder)

The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel

playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources.

• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system

and the selected decode type (p.99).

• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.134).

Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.

Each time you press the key, the surround decoder

changes.

• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are

connected or when “Surround Back” in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”.

L C R

SBL SBR

SW SR

VOL.

STRAIGHT

bPLIIx Movie Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will

be output from the surround/surround back

speakers even when 2-channel source is input.

bPLII Movie

bPLIIx Music Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will

be output from the surround/surround back

speakers even when 2-channel source is input.

bPLII Music

bPLIIx Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Sounds will

be output from the surround/surround back

speakers even when 2-channel source is input.

bPLII Game

Neo:6 Cinema

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix

decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be

output from the surround/surround back

speakers.

Neo:6 Music

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix

decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be

output from the surround/surround back

speakers.

L C R

SL SW SR

VOL.

†‡PLƒx MOVIE

SBL SBR

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

1 2 3

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

UDI

TUNER

STRAIGHT

SUR.DECODE

En 60

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)

When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the

selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the

electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It

allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

Press PURE DIRECT.

Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is

enabled or disabled.

• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.

– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs

– Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu

– Using the multi-zone function

– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced

sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the

sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original

sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along

with any other sound modes.

Press ENHANCER.

Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer

is enabled or disabled.

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling

rate is over 48 kHz.

• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.93) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable

Compressed Music Enhancer.

L C R

SBL SBR

SW SR

VOL.

PURE DIRECT

L C R

SBL SBR

SW SR

VOL.

Enhancer On

ENHANCER

“ENHANCER” lights up

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

1 2 3

NIN

BAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

1 2

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

PURE DIRECT

ENHANCER

En 61

You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or

selecting from registered radio stations.

• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is

being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used

in U.K. and Europe models.

• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM

antennas.

Setting the frequency steps

(Asia and General models only)

At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and

9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the

frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.

Set the unit to standby mode.

When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,

press MAIN ZONE z.

Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”.

Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby

mode and turn it on again.

Selecting a frequency for reception

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).

Use the following keys to set a frequency.

TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the

key for about a second to search stations automatically.

Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to

select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio

station.

“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of

reception range.

• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM

radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.93) in the “Option” menu. When the signal

reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may

improve it.

Listening to FM/AM radio

MAIN ZONE z

STRAIGHTPROGRAM

TUFM50/AM9

VOL.

FM 87.50MHz

VOL.

FM 98.50MHz

STEREO

L C R

SBL SBR

SW SR

TUNED

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENHAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

DMI

OUT

OOT

MAIN

SCEN

RADI

HDM

V-A

AUDI

R. DE

TUNING

BAND

TUNER

Numeric keys

En 62

Registering favorite radio stations (presets)

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have

registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their

preset numbers.

• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using

“Auto Preset” (p.65).

■ Registering a radio station

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.61)

to tune into the desired radio station.

Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected

radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.

Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered

to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most

recently registered number.

• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning

into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and

then press MEMORY again.

■ Selecting a preset station

Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio

station.

You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by

using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.65).

VOL.

01:FM 98.50MHz

STEREO

L C R

SBL SBR

SW SR

TUNED

Preset number

VOL.

02:Empty

STEREO

L C R

SBL SBR

SW SR

TUNED

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

VOL.

01:FM 98.50MHz

STEREO

L C R

SBL SBR

SW SR

TUNED

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

DMI

OUT

OOT

MAIN

SCEN

RADI

HDM

V-A

AUDI

R. DE

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNER

Numeric keys

En 63

Radio Data System tuning

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM

stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of

Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program

Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio

Data System broadcasting station.

■ Displaying the Radio Data System

information

Tune into the desired Radio Data System

broadcasting station.

• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System

broadcasting stations (p.65).

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not

displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System

service.

■ Receiving traffic information

automatically

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit

automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,

follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”

(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.

The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.

Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.

• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor

keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.

• To cancel the search, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the

search finishes.

• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information

stations are found.

Program Service Program service name

Program Type Current program type

Radio Text Information on the current program

Clock Time Current time

DSP Program Sound mode name

Audio Decoder Decoder name

Frequency Frequency

Item name

MUTE

ENHANCER

SLEEP

OUT

ECO

CHARGE

ADAPTIVE DRC

VIRTUAL

Program Type

STEREO

TUNED

VOL.

SBL SBR

Information

MUTE

ENHANCER

SLEEP

OUT

ECO

CHARGE

ADAPTIVE DRC

VIRTUAL

CLASSICS

STEREO

TUNED

VOL.

SBL SBR

Traffic information station (frequency)

MUTE

ENHANCER

SLEEP

OUT

ECO

CHARGE

ADAPTIVE DRC

VIRTUAL

TP FM101.30MHz

VOL.

STEREO

TUNED

SBL SBR

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

INFO

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

En 64

Operating the radio on the TV

You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the

TV.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

■ Playback screen

1 Radio station information

Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected

band (FM/AM) and frequency.

(U.K. and Europe models only)

When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.63), the

Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”

“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.

2 TUNED/STEREO indicators

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu Function

Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.

Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

DMI

OUT

OOT

MAIN

SCEN

RADI

HDM

V-A

AUDI

R. DE

ENTER

TUNER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

En 65

■ Browse screen

1 Preset station list

Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys to select a preset

station and press ENTER to tune into it.

2 Preset number

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• (U.K. and Europe models only)

Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto

Preset”.

Menu Submenu Function

Utility

Memory

Registers the current station to the

preset number selected in the list.

Auto Preset

Automatically registers FM radio

stations with strong signals (up to 40

stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the

list.

Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the

list.

1 Page Down

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ENTER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

En 66

You can play back music files stored on a

Bluetooth

device (such

as smartphones) on the unit.

• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

• For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file

formats” (p.136).

Playing back

Bluetooth

device music on the

unit

Follow the procedure below to establish a

Bluetooth

connection

between a

Bluetooth

device (such as smartphones) and the unit,

and play back music stored the

Bluetooth

device on the unit.

• The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.

Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the

input source.

On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network

name of the unit) from the available device list.

A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will

be made.

If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.

On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start

playback.

The playback screen (artist name, album name and song

title) is displayed on the TV.

• “Not found” appears when no Bluetooth devices are detected.

• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit

automatically connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish

another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth

connection.

• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following

operations.

– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.

– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.

– Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.103) in the “Setup” menu.

• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on

the remote control to control playback.

Playing back music via Bluetooth

The unit

Bluetooth device

(such as smartphones)

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM V

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

OUT

MAIN

RADI

HDM

V-A

R. DE

BLUETOOTH

External device

operation keys

En 67

You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable

supplied with the iPod.

• For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”

(p.136).

• The unit does not support a USB connection for iPad. To play back iPad music on

the unit, use AirPlay (p.80).

Connecting an iPod

Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the

iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.

• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby

mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If

“Network Standby” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to

charge without limit.

• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.

Playback of iPod content

Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start

playback.

You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the

simple play mode (p.69).

Playing back iPod music

(CONNECT)

STRAIGHT

HDMI IN

5V 1A

VIDEO

AUX

The unit (front)

L C R

SBL SBR

SW SR

VOL.

Connected

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

USB

Cursor keys

En 68

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.69) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and

press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.69) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control

playback.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Function

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

OUT

OOT

MAIN

RADI

HDM

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

External device

operation keys

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

En 69

■ Operating the iPod itself (simple play)

Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.

The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are

enabled.

To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.

Operate your iPod itself to start playback.

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.

• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or

press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

Songs (Songs)

Plays back songs in random order.

“x” appears in the TV screen.

Albums

(Albums)

Plays back albums in random order.

“x” appears in the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears in the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs repeatedly.

“v” appears in the TV screen.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

OUT

OOT

MAIN

RADI

HDM

V-A

R. DE

MODE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

En 70

You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on

the unit.

The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or

FAT32 format).

• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats”

(p.136).

Connecting a USB storage device

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.

• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In

this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.

• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.

• Connect a USB storage device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use

extension cables.

Playback of USB storage device contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device

contents and start playback.

You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed

on the TV screen.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is

displayed.

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

RADIO

(CONNECT)

STRAIGHT

HDMI IN

5V 1A

VIDEO

AUX

The unit (front)

USB storage device

L C R

SBL SBR

SW SR

VOL.

Connected

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

USB

En 71

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to

select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

En 72

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the

remote control to control playback.

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB

storage device contents.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Menu Function

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order.

“x” appears on the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly.

“v” appears on the TV screen.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

En 73

You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.32). You can check

whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”

(p.119) in the “Information” menu.

• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired

network connection.

• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.136).

Media sharing setup

To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to

configure the media sharing setting on each music server.

■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed

❑ For Windows Media Player 12

Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.

Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.

Click “Turn on media streaming”.

Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model

name.

Click “OK” to exit.

❑ For Windows Media Player 11

Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.

Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”.

Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click

“Allow”.

Click “OK” to exit.

• For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.

■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software

installed

Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media

sharing settings.

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

En 74

Playback of PC music contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and

start playback.

You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV

screen.

Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the

playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

NET

Cursor keys

En 75

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.76) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and

press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.76) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control

playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS).

• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.96).

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Function

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

OUT

OOT

MAIN

RADI

HDM

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

En 76

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC

music content.

When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order.

“x” appears on the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly.

“v” appears on the TV screen.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

En 77

You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.32). You can

check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly

assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.119) in the “Information” menu.

• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.

• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.

• This service may be discontinued without notice.

Playback of Internet radio

Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and

the playback screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

Listening to Internet radio

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

NET

Cursor keys

En 78

■ Browse screen

1 Playback indicator

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an

item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 Playback information

Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop

playback.

• Some information may not be available depending on the station.

Menu Function

Bookmark On

(Bookmark Off)

Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from

the “Bookmarks” folder (p.79).

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Function

Bookmark On

Adds the current station to the “Bookmarks” folder

(p.79).

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

OUT

OOT

MAIN

RADI

HDM

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

En 79

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks)

By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”,

you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the

browse screen.

■ Registering the station on the

browse/playback screen

Select the desired Internet radio station in the

browse screen or start playback of it to display the

playback screen.

Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On”

and press ENTER.

The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder.

• To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the

“Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”.

■ Registering the station on the vTuner

website

Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit.

This operation is necessary to register the radio station for

the first time.

Check the vTuner ID of the unit.

You can find the vTuner ID in “Network” (p.119) in the

“Information” menu.

Access the vTuner website

(http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on

your PC and enter the vTuner ID.

• To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your

account using your e-mail address.

Click the “Add” icon (

❤

+) next to the station name.

• To remove the station from the “Bookmarks” folder, select “Bookmarks” in

the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (

❤

–) next to the station

name.

You can switch the language.

Enter the vTuner ID in this area.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ENTER

Cursor keys

En 80

The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check

whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”

(p.119) in the “Information” menu.

• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to

connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.136).

• You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay password (p.89).

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents

Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.

Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback

screen on the iPod.

If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( ) appears.

• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.

On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit

(network name of the unit) as the audio output device.

Select a song and start playback.

The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

• The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

Playing back music with AirPlay

iTunes

iPhone/iPad/

iPod touch

Router

(wired or wireless)

The unit

(wired or wireless)

iTunes (example) iPod iOS6 (example)iPod iOS7/iOS8 (example)

iTunes (example) iPod (example)

Network name of the unit

En 81

• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by

setting “Network Standby” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on

iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu.

• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the

iTunes/iPod stops automatically.

• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable

volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.96) in the “Input” menu

to “Off”.

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the

selection.

• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the

remote control to control playback.

• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to

configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers

in advance.

Caution

• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be

unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the

volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod

immediately.

Menu Function

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

iTunes (example of English version)

Check this box

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

OUT

OOT

MAIN

RADI

HDM

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

En 82

The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room

where the unit is installed (Main zone) and in another room (Zone2).

For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (Main zone), another person

can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).

• Analog audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and Bluetooth, USB, and network sources can be output to

Zone2. To listen to the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to the

AUDIO jacks (AV 5–6 or AUDIO 1–2 jacks) of the unit. The party mode (p.86) allows you to play back the

same audio output in Main zone as Zone2, whatever the input audio signal type.

Preparing Zone2

Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit. The connection method varies

depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).

Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)

Living room (Main zone)

Study room (Zone2)

Caution

• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external

amplifier.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the

unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,

“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

En 83

■ Using the unit’s internal amplifier

Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables.

To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.104)

in the “Setup” menu to “7ch +1ZONE” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall

outlet.

• When Zone2 output is enabled (p.85), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

■ Using an external amplifier

Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in Zone2 to the unit with a

stereo pin cable.

SURROUND CENTER

CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2

FRONT

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

SPEAKERS

ZONE2/F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

The unit (rear)

Main zone

Zone2

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

PTICAL

OAXIAL

VIDEO

AV4

AV3

AV2

AV 1

(TV)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDCP2.2

HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2

ARC

ANTENNA

AV 5

VIDEO

AV 6

ZONE OUT

SUR. BACK SU

SINGLE

ZONE 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

(

RADIO

)

AUDIO

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

The unit (rear)

ZONE2 OUT jacks

Zone2

Main zone

External amplifier

Audio input

(analog stereo)

En 84

■ Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection)

You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control

supplied with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.

• (RX-V779 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only)

You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control if you register a remote control code for

each device. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.

Remote connections between Yamaha products

An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that

support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals

by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an

infrared signal receiver.

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VIDEO

AV4

AV3

AV2

AV 1

(TV)

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDCP2.2

ARC

ANTENNA

AV 5

VIDEO

AV 6

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

TRIGGER OUT

REMOTE

12V

OUT

0.1A

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

(

RADIO

)

REMOTE

OUT

The unit (rear)

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

Infrared signal

transmitter

External device

(such as a CD player)

Remote control

(supplied with each device)

Infrared signal

receiver

Zone2

Main zone

REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Yamaha products

(up to six, including the unit)

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

Zone2

En 85

Controlling Zone2

Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.

Press z (receiver power).

Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or

disabled.

When Zone2 output is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the

front display.

Use the following keys to select an input source.

AV 5–6: AV 5–6 (AUDIO) jacks

AUDIO: AUDIO 1–2 jacks (press repeatedly to select

“AUDIO1” or “AUDIO2”)

TUNER: FM/AM radio

BLUETOOTH: Bluetooth connection (the unit as a

Bluetooth receiver)

USB: USB jack (on the front panel)

NET: NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select a

desired network source)

PHONO: PHONO jacks (RX-V779 only [except for U.S.A.

and Canada models])

• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each

zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is

selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches

to “SERVER”.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.61)

• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.66)

• Playing back iPod music (p.67)

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

(p.70)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p.73)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.77)

• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.80)

• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display

or web control (p.87) to control Zone2.

• AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the

main zone.

• To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP

repeatedly. The Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of

time.

• To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE (when using the

unit’s internal amplifier). When using an external amplifier, use the volume

control on it.

• The Zone 2 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input source

selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone 2

input with the web control (p.87) or AV CONTROLLER (p.8).

Caution

• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

USI

PARTY

HDMI

OUT

RADI

HDM

V-A

R. DE

SLEEP

VOLUME

MUTE

AV 5–6

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

MAIN/ZONE2

En 86

■ Enjoying the same source in multiple

rooms (party mode)

The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music

that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode,

stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this

function when you want to use main zone music as background

music for a house party.

Press PARTY.

Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or

off.

When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the

front display.

• If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.114) in

the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default).

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

PARTY

En 87

You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.

• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these

cases, configure the security software appropriately.

• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby

mode, set “Network Standby” (p.89) to “On”.

• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.

– Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x

– Safari 7.x

Start the web browser.

Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.

(Example)

• You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.119) in the “Information” menu.

• You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.89) to access the

web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of

the unit may change each time the unit is turned on.

• If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.112), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC

to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC,

refer to its instruction manual.

• If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way.

– Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the

screen.

• By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an

iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.8).

Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)

Web browser

Web control

Router The unit

Web control

(wired or wireless) (wired or wireless)

En 88

■ Top menu screen

1 CONTROL

Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.

2 STATUS

Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone.

3 SETTINGS

Moves to the settings screen.

4 PA RT Y M ODE

Turns on/off the party mode (p.86).

5 SYSTEM POWER

Turns on/off the power for all zones.

6 MAIN VOLUME

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the

increments used for volume adjustment.

7 RELOAD

Reloads the current status of the unit.

■ Control screen

1 PLAY INFO

Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.

2 TOP MENU

Moves to the top menu screen.

3 SCENE

Selects a scene for the selected zone.

4 POWER

Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.

5 VOLUME

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the

increments used for volume adjustment.

6 RELOAD

Reloads the current status of the unit.

• Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.

En 89

■ Settings screen

1 Rename

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.113) or the name of each zone

(p.114). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

Network

Selects the network connection method (p.111) or configures the network parameters (such as

IP address) (p.111). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

AirPlay Password

Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.80). Click “APPLY” to apply the

changes to the unit.

MAC Filter

Sets the MAC address filter (p.112) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click

“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

Auto Reload

Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control

screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.

Network Standby

Enables/disables the network standby function (p.112).

Backup/Recovery

Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.

Firmware Update

Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.

Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.

Create Link

Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.

Tips

Displays tips for use of the web control.

Licenses

Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit.

2 BACK

Moves to the top menu screen.

3 RELOAD

Reloads the current status of the unit.

Note

• If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.

• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network

devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and

other external devices.

• Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the

settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific

information (such as MAC address and IP address).

• Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.

En 90

Switching information on the front display

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed

item can also be applied separately to each input source group.

* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio

decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.

Viewing the status information on the TV

Press DISPLAY.

The following information is displayed on the TV.

To close the information display, press DISPLAY.

Viewing the current status

Input source group Item

HDMI 1–5

V-AUX

AV 1–6

AUDIO 1–2

Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound

mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

TUNER

Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode

name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

* (U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is

tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (

p.63

Bluetooth

USB

SERVER

AirPlay

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album

name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio

Decoder (decoder name*)

* During simple playback of iPod:

Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode

name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

L C R

SL SW SR

VOL.

Audio Decoder

SBL SBR

Item name

L C R

SL SW SR

VOL.

†‡PLƒx MOVIE

SBL SBR

Information

NET RADIO

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station

(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),

Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

PHONO

(RX-V779 only [except for U.S.A. and Canada

models])

Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound

mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

Input source group Item

Input source/

Party mode

status

Audio format/

Decoder

Compressed Music Enhancer status

CINEMA DSP status

Sound

mode

Volume/

YPAO

Volume

status

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

INFO

DISPLAY

En 91

You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This

menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily

configure settings during playback.

Press OPTION.

Front display

TV screen

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Option menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

• Default settings are underlined.

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

L C R

SBL SBR

SW SR

VOL.

Tone Control

Item Function Page

Tone Control

(Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency

range of sounds.

YPAO Volume

(YPAO Volume)

YPAO Volume

(YPAO Vol.)

Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 92

Adaptive DRC

(A.DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to

minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume

is adjusted.

Dialogue

(Dialog)

Dialogue Level

(Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 92

Dialogue Lift

(Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 92

Subwoofer/Bass

(Subwoofer/Bass)

Subwoofer Trim

(SW.Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 93

Extra Bass

(Extra Bass)

Enables/disables Extra Bass. 93

Enhancer

(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 93

Video Processing

(Video Process.)

Enables/disables the video signal processing

settings configured in the “Setup” menu.

Input Settings

(Input Settings)

Input Trim

(In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. 93

Video Out

(V.Out)

Selects a video to be output with the audio input

source.

FM Mode

(FM Mode)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio

reception.

Traffic Program

(TrafficProgram)

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Automatically searches for a traffic information station.

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.69),

USB storage device (p.72), or media server (p.76).

—

Repeat

(Repeat)

Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.69),

USB storage device (p.72), or media server (p.76).

—

En 92

■ Tone Control (Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.

Choices

Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

Setting range

-6.0 dB to Bypass

(Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments

• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.

Adjusting with the front panel controls

a Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass”.

b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)

Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.

Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and

low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that

you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume.

Settings

• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already

saved (p.36).

• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower

volumes or at night.

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically

adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for

listening to playback at a low volume at night.

Settings

If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide

at a high volume.

■ Dialogue (Dialog)

Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard

clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.

Setting range

to 3

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is

coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing

this setting.

• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.

– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when presence

speakers are used.

– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.56) is working.

(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)

YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)

Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume.

On (On) Enables YPAO Volume.

Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)

Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

On (On)

Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is

enabled.

Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)

Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)

Volume: low Volume: high

Input level Input level

Off

Output level

En 93

Setting range

to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)

■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)

Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy

enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the

presence or absence of the subwoofer.

Settings

■ Enhancer (Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60).

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60).

Settings

Default

TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)

Others: Off (Off)

■ Video Processing (Video Process.)

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings

configured in “Processing” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu.

Settings

■ Input Settings (Input Settings)

Configures the input settings.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume

differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.

Settings

■ FM Mode (FM Mode)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.

Settings

Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)

Extra Bass (Extra Bass)

Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass.

On (On) Enables Extra Bass.

Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Ideal position

Direct (Direct) Disables the video signal processing.

Processing (Processing)

Enables the video signal processing.

Input Trim (In.Trim)

Video Out (V.Out)

Off (Off) Does not output video.

HDMI 1–5 (HDMI1–5),

AV 1–6 (AV1–6),

V-AUX (V-AUX)

Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

Stereo

(Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.

Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.

En 94

CONFIGURATIONS

You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured

and press the cursor key (q).

The input source of the unit also changes.

• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Input menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

• Default settings are underlined.

Configuring input sources (Input menu)

Item Function Page

Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 95

Audio In

Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an

audio jack of others.

Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 95

Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via

AirPlay.

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media

Controller (DMC) to control playback.

En 95

■ Rename/Icon Select

Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Input sources

HDMI 1–5, V-AUX, AV 1–6, AUDIO 1–2, USB, PHONO*

* RX-V779 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models)

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).

• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Audio In

Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. For

example, use this function in the following cases.

• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio

output

• Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo

jacks (such as game consoles)

Input sources

HDMI 1–5, AV 1–2

■ Setup procedure

(To input audio through a digital optical jack)

Select “AV1” or “AV4” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks

with a digital optical cable.

(To input audio through a digital coaxial jack)

Select “AV2” or “AV3” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks

with a digital coaxial cable.

(To input audio through analog audio jacks)

Select “AV5”, “AV6”, “AUDIO1”, or “AUDIO2”, and connect the device to the unit’s

corresponding audio jacks with a stereo pin cable.

■ Decoder Mode

Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.

For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder

Mode” to “DTS”.

Input sources

HDMI 1–5, V-AUX, AV 1–4

Settings

Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.

DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)

En 96

■ Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.

Input sources

AirPlay

Settings

■ DMC Control

Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback.

Input source

SERVER

Settings

• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.

When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media

Player 12) on the same network.

You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.54) using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and

press the cursor key (q).

• You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.

Limited

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range

(-80 dB to 0 dB and mute).

Full

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to

+16.5 dB and mute).

Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable

Allows DMCs to control playback.

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)

En 97

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Scene menu items

■ Save

Registers the unit’s current settings (input source, sound program/surround decoder,

Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI output jack [RX-V779 only]) in the

selected scene.

• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device

assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.54).

■ Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.

Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene

assignments.

Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected

to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)

Settings

Default

SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control

SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO): Off

• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set

“HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.139).

Displays the assignments of the selected scene.

Item Function Page

Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 97

Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can

also configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the

scene assignments.

Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 98

Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 98

Device Control

Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.

HDMI Control

Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this

if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is

connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports

HDMI Control.

Detail

Input Input source to be used

HDMI Output

(RX-V779 only)

HDMI OUT jack to be used

Mode Sound program/surround decoder to be used

Enhancer Compressed Music Enhancer on/off

En 98

■ Rename/Icon Select

Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Reset

Restores the default settings (p.54) for the selected scene.

You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the

TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be

configured and press the cursor key (q).

• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Configuring sound programs/surround

decoders (DSP Program menu)

En 99

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

DSP Program menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.

• Default settings are underlined.

■ Settings for sound programs

Item Function Settings

Decode Type

Selects a surround decoder to be used

in combination with the selected sound

program.

bPLIIx Movie (bPLII

Movie), bPLIIx Music*

(bPLII Music*), bPLIIx

Game* (bPLII Game*),

Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music*

(* Available only when

“SURROUND DECODER” is

selected)

DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.

-6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB

Higher to enhance the sound

field effect, and lower to

reduce it.

Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and presence sound field

generation.

1 ms to 99 ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Surround Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and surround sound field

generation.

1ms to 49ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Surround Back Initial

Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and surround back sound field

generation.

Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

presence sound field.

0.1 to 2.0

Higher to enhance the

broadening effect, and lower

to reduce it.

Surround Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

surround sound field.

Surround Back Room

Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

surround back sound field.

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the presence sound

field.

0 to 10

Higher to enhance the

reflectivity, and lower to

reduce it.

Surround Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround sound

field.

Surround Back

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround back

sound field.

En 100

The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”.

• Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.

■ Settings for decoders

The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND

DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” or “Neo:6 Music”.

Reverb Time

Adjust the decay time of the rear

reverberant sound.

1.0 s to 5.0 s

Higher to enrich the

reverberant sound and lower

to have clear sound.

Reverb Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and reverberant sound

generation.

0 ms to 250 ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Reverb Level

Adjusts the volume of the reverberant

sound.

0% to 100%

Higher to strengthen the

reverberant sound, and lower

to weaken it.

Sound program

Item Function Settings

2ch Stereo Direct

Selects whether to

automatically bypass the

DSP circuit when an

analog audio source is

played back.

Auto

, Off

7ch Stereo

Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0

to +5

Front / Rear Balance

Adjusts the front and rear

volume balance.

-5 to 0

to +5

Higher to enhance the front

side, and lower to enhance

the rear side.

Left / Right Balance

Adjusts the left and right

volume balance.

-5 to 0

to +5

Higher to enhance the right

side, and lower to enhance

the left side.

Height Balance

Adjust the height volume

balance using the

presence speakers.

0 to 5

to 10

Higher to enhance the

upside, and lower to

enhance the downside. (The

presence speakers do not

produce sounds when

“Height Balance” is set to

“0”.)

Monaural Mix

Enables/disables

monaural sound output.

Off

, On

Item Function Settings

Decode Type Item Function Settings

bPLIIx Music

Panorama

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the front sound

field.

Off

, On

Select “On” to wrap front left/right

channel sounds around the field

and generate a spacious sound

field in combination with the

surround sound field.

Center Width

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the center

sound field.

0 to 3

to 7

Higher to enhance the broadening

effect, and lower to reduce it

(closer to center).

Dimension

Adjusts the difference in

level between the front

and surround sound

fields.

-3 to 0

to +3

Higher to strengthen the front

sound field and lower to strengthen

the surround sound field.

Neo:6 Music Center Image

Adjusts the center

orientation level

(broadening effect) of

the front sound field.

0.0 to 0.3

to 1.0

Higher to strengthen the center

orientation level (less broadening

effect) and lower to weaken (more

broadening effect).

En 101

You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

En 102

Setup menu items

Menu Item Function Page

Speaker

Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 36

Manual Setup

Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 104

Configuration

Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 104

Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 104

Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 104

Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 105

Front Presence Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected. 105

Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 105

Layout Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used. 105

Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 105

Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 106

Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 106

Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 106

Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 107

Sound

Lipsync

Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 107

Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 107

Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 108

Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 108

Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 108

Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 108

Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume is adjusted. 108

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 108

Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. 108

Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 109

HDMI

HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 110

Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 111

Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 111

En 103

Network

Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 111

IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 111

Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 112

MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 112

Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 113

Bluetooth

Bluetooth Enables/disables the

Bluetooth

functions. 113

Audio Receive Disconnect Terminates the

Bluetooth

connection between the

Bluetooth

device (such as smartphones) and the unit. 66

Bluetooth Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from

Bluetooth

devices (

Bluetooth

standby). 113

Multi Zone

Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen. 114

Zone2 Set

Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 114

Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 114

Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen. 114

Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 114

Function

Display Set

Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 115

Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 115

Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 115

Trigger Output

Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 115

Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 116

Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 116

ECO

Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 116

ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 117

Language Select an on-screen menu language. 117

Menu Item Function Page

En 104

Speaker (Manual Setup)

Configures the speaker settings manually.

• Default settings are underlined.

■ Power Amp Assign

Selects a speaker system.

In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations

are possible using the presence speakers, Zone2 speakers, or bi-amp connection.

Settings

■ Configuration

Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm

(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).

Selects the size of the front speakers.

Settings

• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

Settings

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

Basic

Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using

Zone2 speakers or a bi-amp connection).

7ch +1ZONE

Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers (p.83) in addition to

the speaker system in the main zone.

5ch BI-AMP

Select this option when you connect front speakers that support

bi-amp connections (p.23).

Front

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency

components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components

(configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

Center

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency

components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

None

Select this option when no center speaker is connected.

The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

Surround

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel

frequency components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

None

Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.

The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual

CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.

En 105

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

• This setting is not available in the following cases:

–“Power Amp Assign” is set to “5ch BI-AMP”

–“Surround” is set to “None”

–“Layout (Surround)” is set to “Front”

Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “5ch BI-AMP” or “7ch +1ZONE”.

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.

Settings

• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.

Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.

Choices

Surround

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”.

Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a

speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified

value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers

Settings

40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz

, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz

• If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and

crossover frequency to maximum.

Surround Back

Large x1

Select this option when one large speaker is connected.

The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Large x2

Select this option when two large speakers are connected.

The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Small x1

Select this option when one small speaker is connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

Small x2

Select this option when two small speakers are connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

None

Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.

The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.

Front Presence

Use Select this option when presence speakers are connected.

None Select this option when no presence speakers are connected.

Subwoofer

Use

Normal

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not

reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)

channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels.

Reverse

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed).

The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio

and low-frequency components from other channels.

None

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front

speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and

low-frequency components from other channels.

Layout

Rear

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side

of the room.

Front

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front

side of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.58) works in this case.

Bass Cross Over

En 106

■ Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the

speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance

from “Meter” or “Feet”.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer

Setting range

0.30 m to 3.00 m

to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

■ Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer

Setting range

-10.0 dB to 0.0 dB

to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

■ Parametric EQ

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

Settings

• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto

Setup” have already been saved (p.36). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.

■ Manual equalizer adjustment

Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.

Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.

Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.

• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.

• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.36) to the “Manual” fields for

fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands

and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB

To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER

repeatedly to select an item.

Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected

band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and

the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

Center frequency: 31.3 HZ to 16.0 kHz

Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.

For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.

YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.

YPAO:Front

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as

the front speakers.

YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.

Through Does not use the equalizer.

En 107

■ Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker

balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.

Settings

Sound

Configures the audio output settings.

■ Lipsync

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.

Choices

HDMI 1–5, AV 1–6, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–2

Settings

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

Setting range

• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on

the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.

Off Does not output test tones.

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance

or equalizer.

Delay Enable

Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Enable

Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Auto/Manual Select

Auto

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when

a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the

unit via HDMI.

If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video

and audio output manually.

Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

En 108

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual

Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when

“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.

Setting range

0 ms

to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

• “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.

■ Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and

DTS signals) playback.

Settings

■ Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

■ Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.

Settings

■ Adaptive DSP Level

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume

is adjusted.

Settings

■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.56). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP

3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo).

Settings

■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker

Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround

speakers. When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back

speakers are connected.

Settings

• VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.

Adjustment

Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Minimum/Auto

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low

volumes.

When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is

automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.

Off

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered

standby mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB

increments).

(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max

Volume”.)

Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.

Adjusts the effect level automatically.

Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.

Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.

Off Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).

Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).

En 109

Video

Configures the video output settings.

■ Video Mode

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).

Settings

• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to

reduce video output delay.

• When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not

displayed on the TV screen.

Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to

“Processing”.

Settings

• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MON.CHK” (p.121) in the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be

displayed on your TV normally.)

Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to

“Processing”.

Settings

• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i,

1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals.

Direct Disables the video signal processing.

Processing

Enables the video signal processing.

Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.

Resolution

Through Does not convert the resolution.

Auto

Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.

480p/576p, 720p,

1080i, 1080p, 4K

Output video signals with a selected resolution.

(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)

Aspect

Through Does not convert the aspect ratio.

16:9 Normal

Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side

of the screen.

En 110

HDMI

Configures the HDMI settings.

■ HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.139).

Settings

• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.139) after connecting HDMI

Control-compatible devices.

Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI

Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio

when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.

Settings

AV 1–6, AUDIO 1–2

Default

AV 4

• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for

connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

Enables/disables ARC (p.140) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers

connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the

unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers.

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the

unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

Off Disables HDMI Control.

Enables HDMI Control.

Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby

Sync”.

TV Audio Input

ARC

Off Disables ARC.

Enables ARC.

Standby Sync

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Auto

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the

unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

En 111

■ Audio Output

Selects a device to output audio.

• This setting (except for “HDMI OUT2” [RX-V779 only]) is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit.

Settings

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.

Settings

■ Standby Through

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the

unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input

selection keys (HDMI 1–5, V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in

standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).

Settings

Network

Configures the network settings.

■ Network Connection

Selects the network connection method.

Settings

■ IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

Select whether to use a DHCP server.

Settings

Amp

Off Disables the audio output from the speakers.

Enables the audio output from the speakers.

HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2 (RX-V779 only)

HDMI OUT (TV) (RX-V679 only)

Off Disables the audio output from the TV.

On Enables the audio output from the TV.

Off

(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)

Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

Outputs videos/audio to the TV.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Auto

Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is

set to the power saving mode.

Wired

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with

a commercially-available network cable (p.32)

Wireless (Wi-Fi)

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via

the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see

“Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.45).

Wireless Direct

Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the

unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device

to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.51).

DHCP

Off

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters

manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network

parameters (such as IP address).

En 112

■ Manual network settings

Set “DHCP” to “Off”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys

(q/w) to select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Network Standby

Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network

standby).

Settings

■ MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

Enables/disables the MAC address filter.

Settings

• AirPlay (p.80) and DMC (p.96) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.

Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be

permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.

■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address

6–10” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys

(q/w) to select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

IP Address Specifies an IP address.

Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.

Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Off Disables the network standby function.

Enables the network standby function.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Auto

Enables the network standby function.

(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power

saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.)

Filter

Off Disables the MAC address filter.

Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the

MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access

to the unit.

MAC Address 1–10

En 113

■ Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network

devices.

■ Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Bluetooth

Configures the

Bluetooth

settings.

■ Bluetooth

Enables/disables the

Bluetooth

function (p.66).

Settings

■ Bluetooth Standby

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from

Bluetooth

devices (

Bluetooth

standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns

on when a connect operation is performed on the

Bluetooth

device.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.112) is set to “Off”.

Off Disables the

Bluetooth

function.

Enables the

Bluetooth

function.

Off Disables the

Bluetooth

standby function.

Enables the

Bluetooth

standby function.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

En 114

Multi Zone

Configures the multi zone settings.

■ Main Zone Set

Configures the main zone setting.

Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen.

■ Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Zone2 Set

Configures the Zone2 settings.

Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

• This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.104) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”.

Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

Settings

• This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.104) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”.

Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen.

You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main

Zone Set” (p.114).

■ Party Mode Set

Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.86).

Choice

Target: Zone 2

Settings

Zone Rename

Max Volume

Initial Volume

Off

Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby

mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB

increments).

(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)

Zone Rename

Disable Disables switching to the party mode.

Enable

Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party

mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.

En 115

Function

Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.

■ Display Set

Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

Setting range

-4 to 0

(higher to brighten)

• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.117) is set to “On”.

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is

operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment).

Settings

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.

Settings

■ Trigger Output

Sets the TRIGGER OUT jack to function in sync with the power status of each zone or

input switching.

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.

Settings

Source

Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input,

switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.

Choices

HDMI 1–5, AV 1–6, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–2, TUNER, PHONO*, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB

* RX-V779 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models)

Settings

Manual

Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger

Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function

of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.

Choices

Dimmer (Front Display)

Short Message

On Displays short messages on the TV screen.

Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.

Wallpaper

Piano

Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video

signal.

Gray

Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video

signal.

Trigger Mode

Power

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the

zone specified with “Target Zone.”

Source

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in

the zone specified with “Target Zone.”

An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in

“Source.”

Manual

Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal

transmission with “Manual.”

Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input

source specified in this option.

High

Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source

specified in this option.

Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.

High

Transmits the electronic signal.

En 116

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

Settings

■ Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Settings

• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.

ECO

Configures the power supply settings.

■ Auto Power Standby

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if

no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into

standby mode.

Settings

Default

U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes

Other models: Off

• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the

front display.

Target Zone

Main

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.

Zone2

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.

All

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.

Off

Does not protect the settings.

On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

Icon

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

20 Minutes

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit

and no input signals are detected for 20 minutes.

2 Hours, 4 Hours,

8 Hours, 12 Hours

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for

the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit

will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.

En 117

■ ECO Mode

Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.

When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.

Settings

• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.

• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.

• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.

Language

Select an on-screen menu language.

Settings

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

Off Disables the eco mode.

On Enables the eco mode.

English English

Japanese

French

German

Spanish

Russian

Italian

Chinese

Français

Deutsch

Español

Italiano

En 118

You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Types of information

■ Audio Signal

Displays information about the current audio signal.

• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the

specifications and settings of the playback device.

■ Video Signal

Displays information about the current video signal.

■ HDMI Monitor

Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.

• (RX-V779 only)

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.

Viewing information about the unit

(Information menu)

Input

Format Audio format of the input signal

Channel

The number of source channels in the input signal

(front/surround/LFE)

For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total

(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).

Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal

Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal

Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output

HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output

HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)

Analog Resolution

Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT

jacks (analog)

Interface TV interface

Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV

En 119

■ Network

Displays the network information on the unit.

(When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)

(When using Wireless Direct)

■ System

Displays the system information on the unit.

• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of

the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You

can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating

the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.123).

■ Multi Zone

Displays information about Zone2.

IP Address IP address

Subnet Mask Subnet mask

Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway

DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server

MAC Address (Ethernet)

MAC address

MAC Address (Wi-Fi)

vTuner ID vTuner ID

Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network)

Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection

SSID

(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)

The SSID of the wireless network

SSID The SSID of the wireless network

Security Security method

Security Key Security key

IP Address IP address

Subnet Mask Subnet mask

MAC Address (Wi-Fi) MAC address

Network Connection “Wireless Direct” indication

Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.120)

TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.121)

Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.120)

Tuner Freq. Step

(Asia and General models only)

The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.121)

System ID System ID number

Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit

Input The input source selected for Zone2

Volume The volume setting for Zone2

En 120

Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.

Set the unit to standby mode.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE

Press PROGRAM to select an item.

Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.

Press MAIN ZONE

to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.

The new settings take effect.

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

• Default settings are underlined.

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)

Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the

speakers connected.

Settings

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)

Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:

ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a

unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.

Settings

ID1

, ID2

■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (BD/DVD) together for

3 seconds.

To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (TV) together for

3 seconds.

Configuring the system settings

(ADVANCED SETUP menu)

Item Function Page

SP IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 120

REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 120

(Asia and General models only)

Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.

121

TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 121

MON.CHK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 121

4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K signal format. 122

INIT Restores the default settings. 122

MAIN ZONE z

STRAIGHTPROGRAM

UPDATE Updates the firmware. 122

VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 122

6  MIN

Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You

can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

 MIN

Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the

unit.

Item Function Page

SP IMP.••8¬MIN

REMOTE ID••ID1

En 121

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)

(Asia and General models only)

Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or

region.

Settings

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)

Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.

Settings

NTSC, PAL

Default

U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC

Other models: PAL

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output

(MON.CHK)

The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI

OUT jack.

Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”

(p.109) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a

different resolution than the detected resolution.

Settings

• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV

after “MON.CHK” has been set to “SKIP”.

FM100/AM10

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz

steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.

FM50/AM9

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps

and AM by 9-kHz steps.

TU••••FM50/AM9

TV FORMAT•NTSC

YES

Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

resolution supported by the TV only.)

SKIP

Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)

MON.CHK••••YES

En 122

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)

Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz)

compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit.

Settings

• When “MODE 1” is selected, use a high-speed HDMI cable that supports 18 Gbps.

Restoring the default settings (INIT)

Restores the default settings for the unit.

Choices

Updating the firmware (UPDATE)

New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be

released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit

is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For

details, refer to the information supplied with updates.

■ Firmware update procedure

Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure

you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to

start firmware update.

Choices

• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after

ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in

“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.123).

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)

Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.119) in the “Information” menu.

• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.

MODE 1

Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 format.

(4:2:0 format only for VIDEO AUX [HDMI IN] jack)

Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not

be displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.

MODE 2

Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:2:0 format.

VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.

ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.

4K MODE•MODE 2

INIT••••CANCEL

USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.

UPDATE•••••USB

VERSION••xx.xx

En 123

New firmware that provides additional features or product

improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected

to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and

update it.

• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.122).

A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed

after ON SCREEN is pressed.

Read the on-screen description.

To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to

select “START” and press ENTER.

The on-screen display turns off.

If “Update Success Please Power Off!” appears on

the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front

panel.

The firmware update is complete.

• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation

mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a

message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.119). You can update the

unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network

Note

• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during

firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more

(depending on your Internet connection speed).

• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be

possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,

update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.122).

• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.

Information

icon

Message

System Icon

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

NET

PARTY HDMI OUT

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

USB

MODE

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

V-AUX

1234

AUDIO

TUNER

SUR. DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

USI

PARTY

HDMI

BLUETOO

MAIN

ONE

SCEN

RADI

HDMI

AUX

AUDI

TUNER

R. DE

ENTER

Cursor keys

En 124

APPENDIX

The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound

balance...

If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to

optimize the speaker settings again (p.36). If you want to adjust the speaker settings

manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.104).

Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the

volume control...

If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the

volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or

speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum

volume level for the unit in advance (p.108). You can also set the maximum volume for

Zone2 (p.114).

I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning

on the unit...

By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically

applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the

volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.108). You can also set the initial

volume for Zone2 (p.114).

We are bothered by volume differences when switching

between input sources…

You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in

the “Option” menu (p.93).

I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at

all...

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.139). After

connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,

enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This

setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your

system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback

devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.

I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during

operations...

By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated

(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you

when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.115) in the

“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...

You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by

utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.116).

The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another

Yamaha product as well as the unit...

When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another

Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,

remote control (p.120).

I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device

even when the unit is in standby mode…

If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output

videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in

standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu

to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the

unit when this function is enabled.

Frequently asked questions

En 125

Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.

If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

First, check the following:

a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets

securely.

b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.

c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

Power, system and remote control

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated three times

consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby

indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.

As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your

nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.

The power does not turn off.

The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to

initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable

from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.22).

The unit enters standby mode automatically.

The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.

The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used

for the specified time.

To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”

menu to “Off” (p.116).

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.120).

The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short

circuit.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.22).

The unit is not reacting.

The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to

initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable

from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

En 126

Audio

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote

control.

The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).

The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.

The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or

strong lighting.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

(RX-V779 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only)

The remote control is set to control external devices.

Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in

orange).

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.120).

Problem Cause Remedy

No sound.

Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio

format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118).

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume cannot be increased.

The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.108).

A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker.

The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118).

The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the

speaker.

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.107).

Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.36) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change

the speaker settings (p.104).

The volume of the speaker is set too low.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.36) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the

speaker volume (p.106).

The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be

malfunctioning.

No sound is coming from the subwoofer.

The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency

signals.

To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu

(p.107).

Subwoofer output is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.36) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use”

(p.105).

The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

En 127

No sound from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from

the SPEAKERS terminals.

In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.111).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is

used).

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the

speakers connected to the unit.

A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with

an HDMI cable.

Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.25).

(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)

The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack

(p.110).

(If you are trying to use ARC)

ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.110). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

Only the front speakers work on multichannel

audio.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as

PCM) only.

To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118). If necessary,

change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.

Noise/hum is heard.

The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The sound is distorted.

The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.117).

A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.

Problem Cause Remedy

En 128

Video

Problem Cause Remedy

No video.

Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MON.CHK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.121).

The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

No video from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video

Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118). For information about video signals

supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.141).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both

the TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2.

The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to other

than the HDMI 1–3 jack.

To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the

playback device to the HDMI 1–3 jack (p.27).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.

The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.

You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with

an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.25).

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

En 129

FM/AM radio

Problem Cause Remedy

FM radio reception is weak or noisy.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio

reception (p.93).

Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

AM radio reception is weak or noisy.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,

thermostats, or other electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor

AM antenna.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Select the station manually (p.61).

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

The AM radio signal is weak.

Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Select the station manually (p.61).

Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with

the supplied AM antenna.

AM radio stations cannot be registered as

presets.

Auto Preset has been used.

Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations

manually (p.62).

En 130

Bluetooth

USB and network

Problem Cause Remedy

A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.

The

Bluetooth

function of the unit is disabled. Enable the

Bluetooth

function (p.113).

Another

Bluetooth

device is already connected to the unit.

Terminate the current

Bluetooth

connection and then establish a new connection

(p.66).

The unit and the

Bluetooth

device are too far apart. Move the

Bluetooth

device closer to the unit.

There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that

outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit away from those devices.

The

Bluetooth

device does not support A2DP. Use a

Bluetooth

device that supports A2DP.

The connection information registered on the

Bluetooth

device is

not working for some reason.

Delete the connection information on the

Bluetooth

device, and then establish a

connection between the

Bluetooth

device and the unit again (p.66).

No sound is produced, or the sound is

interrupted during playback.

The volume of the

Bluetooth

device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the

Bluetooth

device.

The

Bluetooth

device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the

Bluetooth

device to the unit.

The

Bluetooth

connection has been terminated.

Establish a

Bluetooth

connection between the

Bluetooth

device and the unit again

(p.66).

The unit and the

Bluetooth

device are too far apart. Move the

Bluetooth

device closer to the unit.

There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that

outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit away from those devices.

Problem Cause Remedy

The unit does not detect the USB device.

The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be

viewed.

The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.

The network feature does not function.

The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained

properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”

menu to “On” on the unit (p.111). If you want to configure the network parameters

manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other

network devices in your network (p.111).

The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a

wireless router (access point).

The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router.

The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.

There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router

(access point).

Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are

no obstacles between them.

En 131

Wireless network is not found.

Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood

might disturb the wireless communication.

Turn off these devices.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the

wireless router (access point).

Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).

The unit does not detect the PC.

The media sharing setting is not correct.

Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music

contents are shared (p.73).

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access

of the unit to your PC.

Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.

The unit and PC are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and the PC to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.112).

The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played

back.

The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For

information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music

stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.73).

The Internet radio cannot be played.

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have

been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting

silence.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try

the station later or select another station.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your

network devices (such as the router).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be

played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.

The port number varies depending on the radio station.

The iPod does not recognize the unit when using

AirPlay.

The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.

Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the

router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

The application for smartphone/tablet “AV

CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.

The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the

unit (p.112).

Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.122).

Problem Cause Remedy

En 132

Error indications on the front display

Message Cause Remedy

Access denied Access to the PC is denied.

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared

(p.73).

Access error

The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.

The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.67).

There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.

Make sure your router and modem are turned on.

Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.32).

Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.

Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

No device

The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.

Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn

it on again.

RemID Mismatch

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.120).

Unable to play

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some

reason.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be

defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some

reason.

Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the

formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.73). If

the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with

heavy traffic.

USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.

En 133

Use this diagram as a guide. You do not need to adjust the speaker layout to the following diagram exactly.

Ideal speaker layout

6 7

0.3 m (1 ft) or more

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

Turn it slightly inward to

reduce wall reflections.

Turn it slightly inward to

reduce wall reflections.

1 Front speaker (L)

2 Front speaker (R)

3 Center speaker

4 Surround speaker (L)

5 Surround speaker (R)

6 Surround back speaker (L)

7 Surround back speaker (R)

E Presence speaker (L)

R Presence speaker (R)

9 Subwoofer

10° to 30°10° to 30°

En 134

Audio information

■ Audio decoding format

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby

Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems

that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:

“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three

modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for

game sources (for 2-channel sources only).

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a

high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super

Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448

MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB.

This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This

format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital

Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This

decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a

surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a

discrete surround back channel is recorded.

DTS Express

DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher

compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is

developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on

BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home

theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS Neo:6

DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete

full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.

FLAC

FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio

formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

MP3

One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this

compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data

quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

MPEG-4 AAC

An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming

services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality

than MP3.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)

PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This

technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called

Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).

Glossary

En 135

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit

Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal

is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.

• Sampling frequency

Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.

When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.

• Quantization bit

The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a

numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more

accurate.

WAV

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by

converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other

compression methods.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic

technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of

compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

■ Others

Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification

connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a

consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This

channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio

effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.

Lip sync

Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an

increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag

between audio and video output.

HDMI and video information

Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and

the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because

each of these signals is independent.

Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined

and transmitted with a single cable.

Deep Color

Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available

colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems

process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology

allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate

on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.

HDCP

HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of

digital contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).

HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video

signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable

without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a

secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at

“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

x.v.Color

“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than

sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with

the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,

natural images.

Network information

SSID

SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the

Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making

connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance

interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.

WPS

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy

establishment of a wireless home network.

En 136

Yamaha technologies

CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is

best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions

(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are

differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,

Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own

home.

CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA

DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the

accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.

Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music

formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound

system.

SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for

headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with

front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic

sound field in a listening room.

Virtual CINEMA FRONT

Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers

with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic

sound field in a listening room.

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)

Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without

front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D

sound field in your room.

Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)

Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back

speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear

sound filed of CINEMA DSP.

■ Supported devices

❑ Bluetooth device

• The unit supports

Bluetooth

devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.

•A

Bluetooth

device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be

compatible, depending on the model.

❑ USB devices

• The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable

audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.

• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB

chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.

• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.

• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of

the USB storage device.

❑ iPod

• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,

depending on the model or software version of the iPod.

❑ AirPlay

AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X

Mountain Lion or later, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.

(as of April 2015)

Supported devices and file formats

Made for.

iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4,

iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G

iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation)

iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation)

(as of April 2015)

En 137

■ File formats

❑ USB/PC (NAS)

* Linear PCM format only

• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of

FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.

• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.

File

Sampling

frequency

(kHz)

Quantization

bitrate

(bit)

Bitrate

The number

of channels

Gapless

playback

WAV *

32/44.1/48/

88.2/96/176.4/

192

16/24 — 2 ✔

MP3 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —

WMA 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —

MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —

FLAC

32/44.1/48/

88.2/96/176.4/

192

16/24 — 2 ✔

ALAC

32/44.1/48/

88.2/96

16/24 — 2 ✔

AIFF

32/44.1/48/

88.2/96/176.4/

192

16/24 — 2 ✔

DSD

2.8 MHz/

5.6 MHz

1—2—

En 138

Video signal flow

Video signals input from a video device to the unit are

output to a TV as shown below.

■ Video conversion table

• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu.

• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

m: Available

HDMI out COMPONENT VIDEO out

VIDEO

out

Resolution

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i 1080p 4K

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i

480i/

576i

HDMI in

480i/576i mmmmmm

480p/576p mmmmm

720p mmmm

1080i mmmm

1080p/50, 60 Hz mmmm

1080p/24 Hz mm

4K m

COMPONENT

VIDEO in

480i/576i mmmmmmm

480p/576p m

720p m

1080i m

VIDEO in 480i/576i mmmmmm m

Video device The unit TV

HDMI outHDMI in

COMPONENT

VIDEO in

COMPONENT

VIDEO out

VIDEO

out

VIDEO

En 139

HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that

supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as

power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback

devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with

an HDMI cable.

For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.25) and “Connecting video

devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.27).

Operations available from the TV’s remote control

• Standby synchronization

• Volume control including mute

• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner

• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device

• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)

(Example)

Operations available from the unit’s remote control

• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene

selection (p.54)

• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)

• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) using the external

device operation keys

(Example)

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after

connecting the TV and playback devices.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Configure the settings of the unit.

a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

b Press ON SCREEN.

c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

Information on HDMI

HDMI Control

Turn off the TV

The unit turns off

(standby)

HDMI Control

Playback device

also turns off

HDMI Control

Press SCENE (BD/DVD)

Turns on and displays

video from the playback

device

HDMI Control

Playback starts

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

RETURN

PTI

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys

ENTER

En 140

d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.

e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

g Press ON SCREEN.

Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI

Control-compatible BD/DVD players).

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and

playback devices.

Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

Check the followings.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.

If not, select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning

off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in

Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices

exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works

more effectively.

• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.

Audio Return Channel (ARC)

ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video

signal to the TV.

Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.

Select a TV program with the TV remote control.

Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched

to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:

– “ARC” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.

– The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack

marked “ARC”) on the TV.

Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the

instruction manual for the TV.

• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a

digital optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.27).

• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

• “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4

jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To

use the SCENE function (p.54), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV).

En 141

HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals

Video signals

The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending

on the type of the DVD player.

• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction

manual for each device.

• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device

outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).

For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.

Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio

Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),

HD DVD

DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video

Bitstream

(High definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD

High Resolution Audio, DTS

Express

BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD

• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 576p/50 Hz

En 142

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro

Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are trademarks of

Dolby Laboratories.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under

license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, &

DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and

Rights Reserved.

“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic

accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or

iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet

Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its

compliance with safety and regulatory standards.

Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may

affect wireless performance.

iTunes, AirPlay, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari are

trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

The Bluetooth

word mark and logos are registered trademarks

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha

Corporation is under license.

Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)

This receiver supports network connections.

HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are

trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the

United States and other countries.

x.v.Color™

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered

Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.

Windows™

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and other countries.

Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player

are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Android™ Google Play™

Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.

The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi

Alliance.

The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi

Alliance.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

Google Noto Fonts

Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”);

you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.

You may obtain a copy of the License at

http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0

Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software

distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS,

WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either

express or implied.

See the License for the specific language governing permissions

and limitations under the License.

Trademarks

Explanations regarding GPL

This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some

sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and

redistribute this open-source code only. For information on

GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the

GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website

(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).

En 143

Input jacks

• Analog Audio

[RX-V779]

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

Audio x 4 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2)

[Other models]

Audio x 5 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2, PHONO)

[RX-V679]

Audio x 4 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2)

• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)

Optical x 2 (AV 1, AV 4)

Coaxial x 2 (AV 2–3)

•Video

Composite x 4 (AV 3–6)

Component x 2 (AV 1–2)

• HDMI Input

HDMI x 6 (HDMI 1–5, V-AUX)

•Other

USB x 1 (USB2.0)

NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)

Output jacks

• Analog Audio

[RX-V779]

- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch)

(FRONT L/R, CENTER,

SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R

, EXTRA SP L/R

)

*1 Note: Assignment is possible [SURROUND BACK,

BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]

*2 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, PRESENCE]

- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R)

- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono)

- ZONE2 OUT x 1

- Headphone x 1

[RX-V679]

- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch)

(FRONT L/R, CENTER,

SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R

, EXTRA SP L/R

)

*1 Note: Assignment is possible [SURROUND BACK,

BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]

*2 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, PRESENCE]

- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono)

- ZONE2 OUT x 1

- Headphone x 1

•Video

MONITOR OUT

- Component x 1

- Composite x 1

• HDMI Output

[RX-V779]

HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2)

[RX-V679]

HDMI OUT x 1

Other jacks

• YPAO MIC x 1

• REMOTE IN x 1

• REMOTE OUT x 1

• TRIGGER OUT x 1

HDMI

• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC

(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

-VGA

- 480i/60 Hz

- 576i/50 Hz

- 480p/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

- 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• Audio Format

-Dolby TrueHD

- Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital

- DTS-HD Master Audio

- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

- DTS Express

-DTS

- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch

- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

(HDMI 1–3: HDCP 2.2 compatible)

• Link Function: CEC supported

Specifications

En 144

TUNER

• Analog Tuner

[U.K. and Europe models]

FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)

[Other models]

FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

USB

• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory

• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A

Bluetooth

• Sink Function

Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)

• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device

•

Bluetooth

Version................................................. Ver. 2.1+EDR

• Supported Profile................................................ A2DP, AVRCP

• Supported Codec.....................................................SBC, AAC

• Wireless Output ............................................ Bluetooth Class 2

• Maximum Communication Distance....................... 10 m (33 ft)

Network

• PC Client Function

• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5

• AirPlay supported

• Internet Radio

• WiFi function

- Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method

- Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection

and USB connection

- Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device

- Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed

Mode

- Radio Frequency Band: 2.4GHz

- Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n

Compatible Decoding Formats

• Decoding Format

- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX

- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

DTS Express

- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

- DTS Digital Surround

• Post Decoding Format

- Dolby Pro Logic

- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic II Game

- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game

- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

Audio Section

• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)

[RX-V779]

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )

Front L/R................................................................. 95 W+95 W

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

Front L/R............................................................. 110 W+110 W

Center..............................................................................110 W

Surround L/R ...................................................... 110 W+110 W

Surround Back L/R ............................................. 110 W+110 W

[RX-V679]

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )

Front L/R................................................................. 90 W+90 W

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

Front L/R............................................................. 105 W+105 W

Center..............................................................................105 W

Surround L/R ...................................................... 105 W+105 W

Surround Back L/R ............................................. 105 W+105 W

• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)

[RX-V779]

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Front L/R.....................................................................130 W/ch

Center .......................................................................130 W/ch

Surround L/R ..............................................................130 W/ch

Surround Back L/R.....................................................130 W/ch

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 )

Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models]..........................160 W/ch

[RX-V679]

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Front L/R.....................................................................125 W/ch

Center .......................................................................125 W/ch

Surround L/R ..............................................................125 W/ch

Surround Back L/R.....................................................125 W/ch

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 )

Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models]..........................150 W/ch

• Maximum Effective Output Power (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8



)

[China, Korea, Asia and General models]

[RX-V779]

Front L/R.....................................................................160 W/ch

Center ........................................................................160 W/ch

Surround L/R ..............................................................160 W/ch

Surround Back L/R.....................................................160 W/ch

[RX-V679]

Front L/R.....................................................................150 W/ch

Center ........................................................................150 W/ch

Surround L/R ..............................................................150 W/ch

Surround Back L/R.....................................................150 W/ch

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

[RX-V779]

Front L/R (8/6/4/2 ) ..................................130/170/195/240 W

[RX-V679]

Front L/R (8/6/4/2 ) ..................................125/165/190/235 W

• Damping Factor

Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8  .............................100 or more

En 145

• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance

[RX-V779]

PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)

[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models].............3.5 mV/47 kΩ

AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)..............................200 mV/47 kΩ

[RX-V679]

AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)..............................200 mV/47 kΩ

• Maximum Input Signal

[RX-V779]

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD)

[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models]........................ 60 mV

AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ........................... 2.3 V

[RX-V679]

AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ........................... 2.3 V

• Output Level / Output Impedance

[RX-V779]

PRE OUT...................................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER ...........................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ

ZONE2 OUT.......................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ

[RX-V679]

SUBWOOFER ...........................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ

ZONE2 OUT.......................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ

• Headphone Impedance ...................................... 16 Ω or more

• Frequency Response

AV 5 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ......................... +0/-3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

[RX-V779]

PHONO

[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models]....................0±0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

[RX-V779]

PHONO to Speaker Out (FRONT) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V)

[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models] .............0.02% or less

AV 5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct)

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ...............................0.06% or less

[RX-V679]

AV 5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct)

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ...............................0.06% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

[RX-V779]

PHONO (Input Shorted 35 mV, Speaker Out [FRONT])

[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models]............96 dB or more

AV 5 etc. (Pure Direct) (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out)

.........................................................................110 dB or more

[RX-V679]

AV 5 etc. (Pure Direct) (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out)

.........................................................................110 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation

[RX-V779]

PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models]

................................................................ 60 dB/55 dB or more

AV 5 etc. (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

................................................................ 70 dB/50 dB or more

[RX-V679]

AV 5 etc. (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

................................................................ 70 dB/50 dB or more

• Volume Control

Range............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB

Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB

• Tone Control Characteristics

Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz

Bass Turnover ............................................................... 350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut..........................±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz

Treble Turnover..............................................................3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics

(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back)...... 12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct.

Video Section

• Video Signal Type ....................................... NTSC/PAL/SECAM

• Video Signal Level

Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω

Component

Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω

Pb/Pr ................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω

• Video Maximum Input Level........................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Video Signal to Noise Ratio................................ 50 dB or more

• Monitor Out Frequency Response

Component ............................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB

FM Section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models].............. 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models]

...................................... 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models]................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)

Mono ................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono ................................................................................65 dB

Stereo...............................................................................64 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)

Mono .................................................................................0.5%

Stereo................................................................................ 0.6%

• Antenna Input................................................ 75 Ω unbalanced

AM section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models]...................530 kHz to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models]......530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models].........................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz

En 146

General

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General model]............ AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model]................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model]................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models].............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[Asia model] ................................... AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................................... 400 W

[China, Asia and General models] ................................. 270 W

[Other models]................................................................ 300 W

• Standby Power Consumption

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off.......................... 0.1 W

HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals)

......................................................................................... 1.3 W

Network Standby On

Wired ............................................................................ 2.4 W

Wi-Fi.............................................................................. 2.4 W

Wireless Direct.............................................................. 2.5 W

Bluetooth Standby On ..................................................... 2.3 W

HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),

Network Standby On (Wireless Direct)............................ 3.1 W

• Maximum Power Consumption

[Asia and General models]............................................. 590 W

• Dimensions (W x H x D)

[RX-V779]

[China model]

......................... 435 x 171 x 381 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 15”)

[Other models]

................... 435 x 171 x 379 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 14-7/8”)

[RX-V679] ..... 435 x 171 x 378 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 14-7/8”)

* Including legs and protrusions

• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D)

(with wireless antenna upright)

[RX-V779]

[China model]

.........................435 x 234 x 381 mm (17-1/8” x 9-1/4” x 15”)

[Other models]

.................. 435 x 234 x 379 mm (17-1/8” x 9-1/4” x 14-7/8”)

[RX-V679] ..... 435 x 234 x 378 mm (17-1/8” x 9-1/4” x 14-7/8”)

•Weight

[RX-V779] ......................................................10.6 kg (23.4 lbs)

[RX-V679] ......................................................10.0 kg (22.1 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

En 147

Symbols

Exclamation mark (!) 119, 123

Lock icon (o) 116

Numerics

2.1-channel system 20

2ch Stereo 57

4K Ultra HD 141

5.1-channel system 19

7.1-channel system 18

, 21, 22

7ch Stereo 57

Adaptive DRC 92

ADVANCED SETUP 120

AirPlay 80

AM radio 61

ARC (Audio Return Channel) 140

Audio Decoder (front display information) 90

Auto Power Standby 116

Auto Preset (FM radio) 65

Banana plug 22

Bluetooth 66

Bookmark 79

CINEMA DSP 56

Compressed Music Enhancer 60

Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 36

Decoder Off (front display information) 90

Dialogue 92

, 118

Dimmer (Front Display) 115

DLNA 73

DMC (Digital Media Controller) 96

DSP Program (front display information) 90

ECO 116

Error indication (front display) 132

External power amplifier 33

Extra Bass 93

Firmware update 122, 123

FM radio 61

Frequency step setting 61

, 121

Front display information 90

HDCP 27, 128, 135

HDMI output selection 53

HDMI signal compatibility 141

Initial Volume 108, 114

Input (front display information) 90

Input Trim 93

Internet radio 77

iPod content playback 67

Lipsync 135

MAC Address Filter 112

Max Volume 108

, 114

Memory Guard 116

Menu language selection 35

Multiple room playback 82

MUTE 53

, 85

NAS content playback 74

Network Connection 111

Network information 119

Network Name 113

Network Standby 112

Option menu 91

Parametric EQ 106

Party mode 86

Power Amp Assign 104

Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 62

Pure Direct 60

Radio Data System tuning 63

Remote control 14

Remote ID 120

Rename 95

, 98, 113

Repeat 69

, 72, 76

SCENE function 54

Setup menu 101

Short Message 115

Shuffle 69

, 72, 76

Signal information 118

Sleep timer 14

Sound program 56

, 57

Speaker impedance 17

Standby Through 111

Straight decode 59

Subwoofer Trim 93

Surround decoder 59

Test Tone 107

Tone Control 92

Trigger function 33

USB storage device content playback 70

Index

En 148

Video/audio input jack combination 28

Virtual CINEMA FRONT 58

Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) 108

Wallpaper 115

Web control 87

Wired (Network Connection, Setup menu) 111

Wireless (Wi-Fi) 45

, 111

Wireless Direct 51

, 111

WPS 47

YPAO

(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) 36

YPAO Volume 92

Zone2 82, 114

Documenttranscriptie

AV Receiver Owner’s Manual Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit. English CONTENTS Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 7 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Connecting an external power amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 FEATURES 6 Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Useful applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 36 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Front panel (RX-V779) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) (RX-V779 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Front panel (RX-V679) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Rear panel (RX-V779) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Rear panel (RX-V679) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 PREPARATIONS 16 Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 PLAYBACK 1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 53 Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch 3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 (SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . 32 Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 En 2 CONFIGURATIONS Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 94 Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (DSP Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 DSP Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 118 Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 120 Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 (Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 En 3 APPENDIX 124 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Ideal speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 En 4 Accessories Operating range of the remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. • Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below.  Remote control  Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2) (RX-V779) (RX-V679) Within 6 m (20 ft) 30° 30° 30° 30° Insert the batteries the right way round.  AM antenna  FM antenna *One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase. • The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the RX-V779 (U.S.A. model), unless otherwise specified.  YPAO microphone • In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples. • (RX-V779 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only) For information on how to control external devices with the remote control, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM. • Some features are not available in certain regions.  CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)  Easy Setup Guide  Safety Brochure • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. • This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and “iPhone” unless otherwise specified. En 5 • indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations. • indicates supplementary explanations for better use. FEATURES What you can do with the unit Wide variety of supported content • Bluetooth . p.66 • iPod/iPhone . p.67 • USB . p.70 • Media server (PC/NAS) . p.73 • Internet radio . p.77 • AirPlay . p.80 Supports 2- to 7.1-channel (plus presence) speaker system. Allows you to enjoy your favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. • Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.36 settings to suit your room (YPAO) • Reproducing stereo or multichannel . p.56 sounds with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls (CINEMA DSP) • Enjoying compressed music with . p.60 enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) • Playing back music in multiple rooms . p.82 (multi-zone) Network contents Control iPod/iPhone/ Bluetooth device USB device Speakers Audio Audio HDMI Control 4K Ultra HD signals and HDCP 2.2 supported Audio HDMI Control Audio/Video BD/DVD player Audio/Video TV AV receiver (the unit) Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . p.54 Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) TV remote control En 6 . p.139 Full of useful functions! Useful tips ❑ Connecting various devices (p.27) ❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.56) A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, camcorders, and other devices. Connecting presence speakers allows you to create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no presence speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function produces 3D surround sound. In addition, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field even when no surround back speakers are connected. ❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.25) When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. The combination of video/audio input jacks does not match an external device... Use “Audio In” in the “Input” menu to change the combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches the output jack(s) of your external device (p.28). Video and audio are not synchronized... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.107). I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input into the unit (p.111). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination. I want to get more bass sounds… HDMI Control TV audio Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy enhanced bass sounds (p.93). Video from external device I want to change the on-screen menu language... ❑ Various wireless connection methods (p.44) The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to connect to your wireless router (access point) without a network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly without router. Wi-Fi or Wireless Direct VSBS Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.35). I want to update the firmware... ❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed in front (p.58) Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware (p.122). If the unit is connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.123). If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT). Many other settings are available that let you to customize the unit. For details, see the following pages. ❑ Low power consumption (p.117) • Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.99) The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s power consumption. • Various function settings (p.102) • Input settings (p.94) • SCENE settings (p.97) • Information view (such as audio signal and video signal) (p.118) • System settings (p.120) En 7 Useful applications ■ AV CONTROLLER ■ AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet) “AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network products. This application provides you the flexibility to control the available inputs, volume, mute, power commands and playback source. “AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you with cable connections between AV receiver and source devices as well as AV receiver setup. This application guides you through the various settings such as speaker connections, TV and video/audio device connections and selecting the speaker system. Functions • Power on/off and volume adjustment Functions • Input, scene and sound mode selection • Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio devices) • DSP Parameter adjustment • Playback control (including music selection for some sources) • For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play. • Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup assistance with illustrations) • Viewing owner’s manual • For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google Play. En 8 Part names and functions Front panel (RX-V779) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : AM TUNING A MAIN ZONE B PURE DIRECT ZONE 2 ZONE CONTROL MEMORY INFO (WPS) PRESET FM INPUT VOLUME SCENE BD DVD YPAO MIC PHONES TV TONE CONTROL NET PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA C 1 MAIN ZONE z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.110) • Standby Through is enabled (p.111) • Network Standby is enabled (p.112) • An iPod is being charged (p.67) 3 ZONE 2 key Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.85). 4 ZONE CONTROL key Changes the zone (main zone or the Zone2) that is controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.85). 5 INFO (WPS) key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.90). Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.47). 6 MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.62). 7 PRESET keys D RADIO STRAIGHT (CONNECT) E F G H I VIDEO AUX HDMI IN J 5V 1A L K 8 FM and AM keys G SCENE keys Switch between FM and AM (p.61). 9 Front display Displays information (p.11). Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.54). H PROGRAM keys 0 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.55). I STRAIGHT key A TUNING keys Select the radio frequency (p.61). J VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack B PURE DIRECT key Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.60). C INPUT knob For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console (p.30). K USB jack Selects an input source. D PHONES jack For connecting headphones. E YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.36). F TONE CONTROL key Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of output sounds (p.92). Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.62). En Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.59). 9 For connecting a USB storage device (p.70) or an iPod (p.67). L VOLUME knob Adjusts the volume. Front panel (RX-V679) 1 23 MAIN ZONE 4 56 7 8 9 : A B C YPAO MIC PURE DIRECT ZONE 2 ZONE CONTROL INFO (WPS) MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING VOLUME SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT TV TONE CONTROL NET PROGRAM 1 MAIN ZONE z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.110) • Standby Through is enabled (p.111) • Network Standby is enabled (p.112) • An iPod is being charged (p.67) 3 YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.36). 4 ZONE 2 key Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.85). 5 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). 6 ZONE CONTROL key Changes the zone (main zone or the Zone2) that is controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.85). 7 INFO (WPS) key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.90). Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.47). STRAIGHT (CONNECT) SILENT CINEMA D RADIO E F G H I VIDEO AUX HDMI IN J 5V 1A K 8 MEMORY key L G SCENE keys Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.62). 9 PRESET keys Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.62). 0 FM and AM keys Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.54). H PROGRAM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.55). Switch between FM and AM (p.61). A Front display I STRAIGHT key Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.59). Displays information (p.11). B TUNING keys Select the radio frequency (p.61). C PURE DIRECT key J VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console (p.30). K USB jack Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.60). D PHONES jack For connecting headphones. For connecting a USB storage device (p.70) or an iPod (p.67). L VOLUME knob Adjusts the volume. E INPUT keys Select an input source. F TONE CONTROL key Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of output sounds (p.92). En 10 Front display (indicators) 1 2 3 4 5 678 ENHANCER STEREO TUNED OUT 1 2 9: A B C PARTY SLEEP MUTE ZONE 2 VOL. ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL FPL L C R FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR D 1 ECO Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.117). 2 HDMI Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. OUT1/OUT2 (RX-V779 only) 7 Bluetooth indicator 8 PARTY Lights up when the unit is in the party mode (p.86). Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal OUT (RX-V679 only) 0 ZONE2 3 ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60) is working. 4 CINEMA DSP Lights up when CINEMA DSP or CINEMA DSP 3D (p.56) is working. 5 STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. TUNED Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station signal. G E Information display Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device (p.66). 9 SLEEP Lights up when HDMI signals are being output. D F E Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.90). F ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.92) is working. Lights up when the sleep timer is on. Lights up when audio output to Zone2 is enabled (p.85). A MUTE Blinks when audio is muted. B Volume indicator Indicates the current volume. C VIRTUAL Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.56), or the virtual surround processing (p.58) is working. D Cursor indicators Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. 6 Signal strength indicator Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.44). En 11 G Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. A Front speaker (L) S Front speaker (R) D Center speaker F Surround speaker (L) G Surround speaker (R) H Surround back speaker (L) J Surround back speaker (R) K Surround back speaker B Presence speaker (L) N Presence speaker (R) L Subwoofer Rear panel (RX-V779) 1 2 3 4 6 5 7 9 8 0 (U.S.A. model) TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A WIRELESS HDMI OUT HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDMI 4 NETWORK HDMI 5 (NET) HDCP2.2 IN 2 1 (BD/DVD) ARC OUT REMOTE OPTICAL EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 AM COAXIAL AV3 Y PR PB Y PB PR SPEAKERS COMPONENT VIDEO AV2 CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 SURROUND MONITOR OUT OPTICAL CENTER FRONT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP VIDEO AV 1 VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE SINGLE 1 2 AUDIO 1 A AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 SUR. BACK SURROUND ZONE OUT BC D E CENTER PRE OUT For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another room (p.84). 2 TRIGGER OUT jack For connecting to a device that supports the trigger function (p.33). 3 HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible TVs and outputting video/audio signals (p.25). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack. 4 ANTENNA jacks For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.31). 5 HDMI 1–5 jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.27). For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.44). 7 NETWORK jack For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.32). SUBWOOFER * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. F 1 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks 6 Wireless antenna FRONT 8 SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.21). 9 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.34). 0 Power cable For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.34). A PHONO jacks (Except for U.S.A. and Canada models) For connecting to a turntable (p.30). B AUDIO 1–2 jacks For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.30). C AV 1–6 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.27). D ZONE2 OUT jacks For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and for outputting audio (p.83). En 12 E MONITOR OUT jacks COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For connecting to a TV that supports component video and outputting video signals (p.25). VIDEO jack For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and outputting video signals (p.26). F PRE OUT jacks For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or to an external power amplifier (p.33). Rear panel (RX-V679) 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 9 : (U.S.A. model) TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A WIRELESS HDMI OUT HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDMI 4 NETWORK HDMI 5 (NET) HDCP2.2 IN (BD/DVD) ARC OUT EXTRA SP REMOTE OPTICAL ANTENNA VIDEO ZONE2/F.PRESENCE (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 AM COAXIAL AV3 Y PR PB Y PB PR SPEAKERS COMPONENT VIDEO AV2 CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 SURROUND MONITOR OUT OPTICAL CENTER FRONT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP VIDEO AV 1 VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE 1 2 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT ZONE OUT AB C D 1 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another room (p.84). 2 TRIGGER OUT jack For connecting to a device that supports the trigger function (p.33). 3 HDMI OUT jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.25). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack. 4 ANTENNA jacks For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.31). 5 HDMI 1–5 jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.27). 6 Wireless antenna * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. E 8 SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.21). 9 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.34). 0 Power cable For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.34). D MONITOR OUT jacks COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For connecting to a TV that supports component video and outputting video signals (p.25). VIDEO jack For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and outputting video signals (p.26). E SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1–2 jacks For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.33). A AUDIO 1–2 jacks For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.30). B AV 1–6 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.27). C ZONE2 OUT jacks For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and for outputting audio (p.83). For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.44). 7 NETWORK jack For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.32). En 13 Remote control 1 Remote control signal transmitter 1 Transmits infrared signals. 2 z (receiver power) key 2 Turns on/off (standby) the unit. HDMI 1 2 3 V-AUX 5 3 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH 4 5 6 MAIN NET PARTY TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION H I J ENTER RETURN B C D E F G RADIO VOLUME ON SCREEN 9 : A HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD 7 8 USB ZONE 2 DISPLAY BAND K Select an input source for playback. HDMI 1–5 HDMI 1–5 jacks V-AUX VIDEO AUX jack (on the front panel) AV 1–6 AV 1–6 jacks AUDIO AUDIO 1–2 jacks (press repeatedly to select “AUDIO1” or “AUDIO2”) TUNER FM/AM radio BLUETOOTH Bluetooth connection (the unit as a Bluetooth receiver) USB USB jack (on the front panel) NET NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) (RX-V779 [except for U.S.A. and Canada models]) PHONO PHONO jacks 4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch TUNING Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the remote control (p.85). 5 SCENE keys Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.54). 6 PROGRAM keys PRESET 7 External device operation keys SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Displays menus for the HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.139). 8 ON SCREEN key Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. (RX-V779 U.S.A. model) En Switches the iPod operation modes (p.69). A Radio keys Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (p.61). BAND Switches between FM and AM radio. PRESET Select a preset station. TUNING Select the radio frequency. External device operation keys Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is selected as the input source, or control playback of the HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.139). B Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.55). C INFO key Select a sound program (p.55). MODE Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. 0 MODE key 3 Input selection keys 4 9 Menu operation keys 14 Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.90). D SLEEP key Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). E Numeric keys Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies. MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.62). F HDMI OUT key 1 (RX-V779) Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.53). 2 (RX-V679) Enables/disables video/audio output from the HDMI OUT jack (p.53). HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 3 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER Turns on/off the party mode (p.86). BLUETOOTH 4 5 G PARTY key AV 1 MAIN USB Adjust the volume. NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD H VOLUME keys TV NET F G I MUTE key Mutes the audio output. J OPTION key RADIO Displays the option menu (p.91). 6 PROGRAM 7 TOP MENU 8 MUTE VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 9 B C D E Displays status information on the TV (p.90). I OPTION J DISPLAY K • (RX-V779 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only) For information on the keys other than those above, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM. ENTER RETURN : A H K DISPLAY key BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT (RX-V779 U.S.A. model) En 15 PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Placing speakers (p.17) Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room. 2 Connecting speakers (p.21) Connect the speakers to the unit. 3 Connecting a TV (p.25) Connect a TV to the unit. 4 Connecting playback devices (p.27) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit. 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.31) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. 6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna (p.32) Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. 7 Connecting other devices (p.33) Connect external devices, such as an external power amplifier (RX-V779 only) and a device compatible with the trigger function. 8 Connecting the power cable (p.34) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.35) Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English). 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.36) Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room (YPAO). 11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.44) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! En 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 Placing speakers Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. Caution • Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.20). Speaker system (the number of channels) Speaker type Front (L) Abbr. Function 1 Front (R) 2 Center 3 Surround (L) 4 Surround (R) 5 Surround back (L) 6 Surround back (R) 7 Surround back 8 Presence (L) E Presence (R) R Subwoofer 9 Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds). Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected. Produce surround back left/right channel sounds. 7.1+2 7.1 7.1 6.1 5.1 Front 5.1 4.1 3.1 2.1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● *1 ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 ● ● ● ● ● Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. * ● Produces sounds mixed from surround back left/right channel sounds. Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP 3D (p.56), the presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your room. ● ● ● *2 ● ● *2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● If you use five speakers in the front side, use two of them as front surround speakers (*1) or presence speakers (*2). We recommend using them as front surround speakers for enjoying unprocessed playback (p.59) or presence speakers for enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (p.56). • For information on the ideal speaker layout, see “Ideal speaker layout” (p.133). • If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers or presence speakers. To reinforce the rear left/right sounds, use them as surround back speakers. To create a natural 3-dimensional sound field, use them as presence speakers. • Two subwoofers connected to the unit output the same sounds. En 17 ● 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 7.1+2-channel system 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers) E R 1 9 1 2 3 9 9 4 5 6 7 This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers. 6.1-channel system 7.1-channel system (using presence speakers) R 1 4 5 6 • The surround back speakers and presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.56). 9 3 4 7 E 2 1 2 9 3 2 3 4 5 5 8 This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speaker. This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents. En 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 5.1-channel system Front 5.1-channel system (using presence speakers) E 1 9 R 1 2 9 3 4 2 3 5 This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents. This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers) 4.1-channel system 1 9 1 2 4 2 5 9 3 4 Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”. • You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system). En 19 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Setting the speaker impedance 2.1-channel system Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a 6-ohm speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 1 2 9 1 Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet. 2 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). STRAIGHT 3 • Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system. Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display. SPIMP.8MIN 4 5 Press STRAIGHT to select “6  MIN”. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power cable from the AC wall outlet. You are now ready to connect the speakers. En 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 2 Connecting speakers Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. The following diagrams provide connections for 7.1+2-, 7.1-, and 6.1-channel systems as examples. For other systems, connect speakers while referring to the connection diagram for the 6.1-channel system. 7.1+2-channel system 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers) EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE Caution The unit (rear) • Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers. The unit (rear) SPEAKERS SPEAKERS CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 SURROUND • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. CENTER FRONT CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SURROUND SINGLE 1 CENTER FRONT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SINGLE 1 2 2 SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER • The illustrations of the unit (rear) used in this section are of the RX-V779. Cables required for connection (commercially available) Speaker cables (x the number of speakers) + – E R + – 1 2 1 2 Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers) 9 3 9 4 5 6 7 En 21 9 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 7.1-channel system (using presence speakers) ■ Connecting speaker cables 6.1-channel system EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE The unit (rear) SPEAKERS CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 CENTER a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. The unit (rear) SPEAKERS CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 SURROUND Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal. FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SINGLE 1 CENTER FRONT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SINGLE 1 2 2 SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER b Loosen the speaker terminal. c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the terminal. d Tighten the terminal. + (red) b c FR ON T d E R 1 a - (black) 2 1 2 Using a banana plug (U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only) 9 3 9 a Tighten the speaker terminal. 3 b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal. 4 5 4 5 8 When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). En 22 Banana plug a b FR ON T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Push-type speaker terminals (RX-V679 only) a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. b Press down the tab. c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the hole in the terminal. d Release the tab. a Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks. To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu to “5ch BI-AMP” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE ZO EXT NE RA 2/F SP .PR ES E NC E d b + (red) c The unit (rear) SPEAKERS CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 SURROUND CENTER FRONT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP - (black) SINGLE 1 ■ Connecting the subwoofer 2 SUBWOOFER Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer. Audio pin cable 1 CENT 2 ER FRON T 3 9 4 5 • The FRONT jacks and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks output the same signals. En 23 Caution • Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. • Surround back speakers cannot be used during bi-amp connections. Input/output jacks and cables ■ Video/audio jacks ■ Video jacks ■ Audio jacks ❑ HDMI jacks ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ❑ OPTICAL jacks Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. HDCP2.2 HDMI cable Digital optical cable (BD/DVD) OPTICAL MONITOR OUT Component video cable • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. ❑ COAXIAL jacks Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. ❑ VIDEO jacks Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. Digital coaxial cable • The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission features. • Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos. COAXIAL MONITOR OUT Video pin cable ❑ AUDIO jacks Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable (RCA cable). Stereo pin cable En 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 Connecting a TV ■ Component/composite video connection Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks. To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI cable. When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. ■ HDMI connection Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable. • If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. • (RX-V779 only) You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.26). • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. HDMI OUT jack The unit (rear) • If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit. HDMI OUT HDCP2.2 2 TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A HDMI input 1 ARC HDMI OUT HDMI 1 HDMI 2 H HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 H 2 1 REMOTE OPTICAL HDMI (BD/DVD) ARC ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable) HDMI HDCP2.2 IN OUT ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 HDMI AM Video input (component video) COAXIAL AV3 Y PR PB Y PB PR COM OPTICAL AV2 OPTICAL AV 1 AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack COMPONENT VIDEO MONITO O (TV) AV4 V VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SING AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks The unit (rear) OPTICAL O TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A SUR. BA ZONE OUT HDMI OUT 2 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 H PR PR PB COMPONENT VIDEO PB Y MONITOR OUT Y 1 (BD/DVD) ARC OUT Audio output (digital optical) HDMI 1 HDCP2.2 IN TV PR REMOTE OPTICAL Y PB ANTENNA VIDEO PR (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 AM PB Y COAXIAL AV3 Y OPTICAL AV2 OPTICAL • You do not make a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases: AV 1 PR PB Y PB PR COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT (TV) AV4 VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE OPTICAL O – If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC) – If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box AUDIO 1 • If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. AV 5 AV 6 ZONE OUT SUR. BACK SURROUND C PR AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.139). About Audio Return Channel (ARC) • ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. En AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 25 O Audio output (digital optical) TV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable) The unit (rear) TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A HDMI OUT HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 H HDCP2.2 IN 2 1 REMOTE OPTICAL VIDEO (BD/DVD) ARC OUT Video input (composite video) MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack MONITOR OUT ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 V AM V VIDEO COAXIAL AV3 Y PR PB Y PB PR OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AV2 OPTICAL MONITOR OUT (TV) AV4 AV 1 VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE OPTICAL O AUDIO 2 AUDIO 1 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 SUR. BACK SURROUND ZONE OUT C PR O AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack TV Audio output (digital optical) ■ Connecting another TV or a projector (RX-V779 only) The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching videos with the remote control (p.53). HDMI OUT 2 jack TV The unit (rear) HDMI OUT HDCP2.2 TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A 2 HDMI OUT 1 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 H HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 H ARC HDCP2.2 IN 2 1 (BD/DVD) ARC OUT REMOTE OPTICAL ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM AM HDMI (TV) AV4 COAXIAL TV (already connected) AV3 Y PR PB Y PB HDMI PR HDMI input COM AV2 MONITO OPTICAL HDMI V AV 1 VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SING AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 SUR. BA ZONE OUT Projector • HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack. En 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 4 Connecting playback devices ■ Component video connection The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages. Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. – Connecting an iPod (p.67) – Connecting a USB storage device (p.70) Output jacks on video device Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) Input jacks on the unit Video Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. Audio Digital optical AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL) Component video AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks The unit (rear) • If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.28). Y TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A HDMI 1 HDMI 2 H HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 H 2 1 (BD/DVD) ARC OUT REMOTE OPTICAL PB PR Y PB PR ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM Y AM COMPONENT VIDEO (TV) AV4 Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. PR HDCP2.2 IN ■ HDMI connection COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB HDMI OUT Video output (component video) COAXIAL PB AV3 Y PR PB Y PB PR COM HDMI 1–5 jacks The unit (rear) AV2 V AV 1 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDMI 4 VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SING HDMI 5 WIRELESS HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDMI 4 C C HDMI 5 (BD/DVD) AV2 (BD/DVD) ARC Y MONITO OPTICAL AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 COAXIAL SUR. BA ZONE OUT OPTICAL O ANTENNA (RADIO) FM O AM AV 1 OPTICAL Video device HDMI PR Y PB PR CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE SURROUND AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack HDMI output SPEAKERS COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT CENTER VIDEO VIDEO T VIDEO SINGLE 2 O1 AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 ZONE OUT SUR. BACK HDMI 1 SURROUND CENTER PRE OUT FRONT SUBWOOFER Audio output (digital optical or digital coaxial) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. HDMI Video device • The component video signals (other than 480i/576i signals) input to AV 1–2 jacks of the unit can be output from the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks only. To watch those videos, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit (p.25). For details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.138). If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–5, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–5 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.25). • If your video device supports HDCP 2.2, connect the device to the HDMI 1–3 jacks. En 27 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Composite video connection ■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks. Output jacks on video device Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit Input jacks on the unit Video Audio Composite video Video Digital coaxial AV 3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 5–6 (VIDEO + AUDIO) AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jack HDMI HDMI OUT HDMI 1 HD HDCP2.2 HDC V HDCP2.2 2 Audio Digital optical HDMI 1–5 AV 1 (OPTICAL) AV 4 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial HDMI 1–5 AV 2–3 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo HDMI 1–5 AV 5–6 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1–2 Analog stereo AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) AV 5–6 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1–2 VIDEO VIDEO IN Video Video output (composite video) Component video TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A Audio V 1 (BD/DVD) ARC OUT REMOTE OPTICAL ❑ Necessary setting ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 A For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows. COAXIAL AV3 Y PR PB Y Video device OPTICAL PB O AV2 O OPTICAL OPTICAL AV 1 VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Video output (component video) COAXIAL C C The unit (rear) COAXIAL AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AV 5 AV 6 L Z L L R R HDMI OUT R The unit (rear) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 2 1 (BD/DVD) ARC Y OPTICAL PR PB ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM (TV) AV2 AV4 Audio output (either digital optical, digital coaxial, or analog stereo) PR HDCP2.2 IN OUT REMOTE Any of AV 3 (COAXIAL) jack, AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack, AV 5–6 (AUDIO) jacks COMPONENT VIDEO AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A PR PR PB PB Y Y AM COAXIAL PB AV3 Y PR PB Y Y PB AV2 OPTICAL AV 1 AUDIO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–6, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. L L L AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE AV 5 AV 6 ZONE O R R R AV 5 • To watch videos input to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack (p.25) or to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack (p.26) of the unit. For details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.138). En AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks 28 Audio output (analog stereo) Video device 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 • The following operation is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 1 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit. 2 Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input source. 6 7 Use the cursor keys to select “Audio In” and press ENTER. 8 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “AV5” (audio input jack to be used). V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER USB NET N BLUETOOTH TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN 3 4 5 AV 2 DISPLAY ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER This completes the necessary settings. If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AV2” (video input jack to be used) and press the cursor key (q). En 29 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) Connecting to the jacks on the front panel Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit. Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit Digital optical AV 1 (OPTICAL) AV 4 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AV 2–3 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo AV 5–6 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1–2 Turntable (PHONO) PHONO* Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.67) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.70). Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. ❑ HDMI connection Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with an HDMI cable. BD DVD PHONES * RX-V779 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models) The unit (rear) SILENT CINEMA Audio output (either digital optical, digital coaxial, or analog stereo) AV 1–6 jacks AUDIO 1–2 jacks TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A YPAO MIC TONE CONTROL TV NET PROGRAM RADIO STRAIGHT (CONNECT) VIDEO AUX HDMI IN 5V 1A HDMI The unit (front) O HDMI OUT HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDMI 4 HDCP2.2 IN 2 OPTICAL 1 (BD/DVD) ARC OUT REMOTE OPTICAL VIDEO OPTICAL (TV) AV4 C ANTENNA (RADIO) FM AM COAXIAL O COAXIAL L AV3 Y PR PB COAXIAL Y PB L COMPONENT VIDEO AV2 C OPTICAL MONITOR OUT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE L AUDIO 1 Game console R VIDEO AV 1 Audio device PR AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 SUR. BACK SURROUND ZONE OUT CENTER PRE OU R R PHONO L L L R R GND Camcorder R GND PHONO PHONO jacks* Ground lead Turntable If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. Audio output (PHONO) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–6, AUDIO or PHONO*, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.25). When connecting a turntable • You need to prepare an HDMI cable that match the output jacks on your device. (RX-V779 only [except for U.S.A. and Canada models]) • The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer. • Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal. En 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. FM antenna AM antenna The unit (rear) TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A WIRELESS HDMI OUT HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDMI 4 NETWORK HDMI 5 (NET) HDCP2.2 IN 2 1 ARC OUT (BD/DVD) REMOTE OPTICAL ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 AM COAXIAL AV3 Y PB PR Y PB PR COMPONENT VIDEO AV2 MONITOR OUT OPTICAL SPEAKERS CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 SURROUND CENTER FRONT VIDEO AV 1 COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO Assembling and connecting the AM antenna Hold down Insert Release • Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. En 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. • Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit. • Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit. • To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. Connecting the network cable Preparing the wireless antenna Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). Internet If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up straight. Network Attached Storage (NAS) For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see “Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.44). WAN LAN Modem PC Network cable The unit (rear) Router WIRELESS S ES WIREL NETWORK (NET) EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE Mobile device (such as iPod touch and iPhone) SPEAKERS CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 • Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it. • If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set “Network Connection” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”. • If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters manually (p.111). • You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.119) in the “Information” menu. En 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 7 Connecting other devices Connecting an external power amplifier 4 FRONT jacks (RX-V779 only) 5 SUBWOOFER1–2 jacks Output front channel sounds. For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier. When 2 subwoofers are connected, the same sound is output from them. When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function Caution The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by connecting the external device to the TRIGGER OUT jack with a monaural mini-jack cable. • To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making connections. – Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them. – When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. – When using an external amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to the amplifier. TRIGGER OUT jack TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A HDMI OUT The unit (rear) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 2 1 (BD/DVD) ARC REMOTE OPTICAL WIRELESS MI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 P2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDMI 4 ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 NETWORK HDMI 5 System connector jack HDCP2.2 IN OUT AM (NET) COAXIAL DVD) AV3 EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE Y ANTENNA Y PB PR AV 1 PB MO OPTICAL AM Y PR PB AV2 (RADIO) FM PR VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SPEAKERS COMPONENT VIDEO CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 SURROUND MONITOR OUT CENTER FRONT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP VIDEO AUDIO 1 SINGLE 1 SINGLE AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 ZONE OUT Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection 2 ZONE 2 AV 6 ZONE OUT SUR. BACK SURROUND CENTER PRE OUT FRONT SUBWOOFER The unit (rear) 123 4 5 1 SUR. BACK jacks • You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu. Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). 2 SURROUND jacks Output surround channel sounds. 3 CENTER jack Outputs center channel sounds. En 33 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 Connecting the power cable Before connecting the power cable (General model only) Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz. • Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard. VOLTAGE SELECTOR The unit (rear) VOLTAGE SELECTOR EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE 220V240V 110V120V NT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SINGLE After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. The unit (rear) To an AC wall outlet NETWORK (NET) EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE SPEAKERS WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 CENTER FRONT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SINGLE En 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language HDMI 1 2 3 4 Select the desired on-screen menu language from English (default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 1 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired language. 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND • If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3. ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. MODE TUNING PRESET To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 • The information on the front display is provided in English only. 4 En 35 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) HDMI 1 2 3 4 The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 • If you are using bi-amp connection or Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before starting YPAO. • If you want to use the surround speakers for the front 5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.19), set “Layout (Surround)” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu to “Front”. HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control) technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed for acoustic perfection. RADIO VOLUME – Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children. OPTION • Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. – Test tone volume cannot be adjusted. ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. • Note the following regarding YPAO measurement. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 4 ENTER – Keep the room as quiet as possible. RETURN – Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone. – Do not connect headphones. YPAO MIC jack SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP The unit (front) YPAO MIC PRESET ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3. 3 Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN 1 9 4 2 3 YPAO 5 microphone Ear height 9 MAX En 36 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 (RX-V679) 2 5 The following screen appears on the TV. HDMI 1 3 4 a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER. V-AUX 5 (RX-V779 only) If desired, change the measuring method (multi/single). AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER. NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO This completes the preparations. VOLUME See “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.38) to start the measurement. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Settings OPTION (RX-V779) ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Yes Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure). No (default) Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position (single measure). The following screen appears on the TV. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a wider space. Proceed to Step 5. • If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated most frequently. • To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the measurement. • To configure the power amplifier assignment setting, press RETURN and select “Manual Setup” (p.104). En 37 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Single measure Multi measure (5 listening positions) HDMI 1 2 3 4 Follow the procedure below for measurement. It takes about 3 minutes to perform the measurement. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 1 HDMI OUT a d TV NET PROGRAM MUTE e To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. bac SCENE BD DVD Measuring at one listening position (single measure) RADIO VOLUME • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. TOP MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. Multi measure Multi measure (1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back) POP-UP/MENU Cursor keys ENTER RETURN BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT b c a e d c a b d 4 • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.42) or “Warning messages” (p.43). This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the measurement. When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”: “Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) (RX-V779 only)” (p.39) When “Multi Position” is set to “No”: “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.38) En 38 • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.41). 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 HDMI 1 2 3 4 To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for measurement. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening positions. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.42) or “Warning messages” (p.43). SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) (RX-V779 only) RADIO The adjusted speaker settings are applied. VOLUME 1 The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER. • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at the first position finishes. BAND MODE TUNING To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 • If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. • You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.92) in the “Option” menu. 5 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. Caution • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). En 39 2 Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position and press ENTER. Repeat Step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to 8) have been taken. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB When the measurements at the positions you want to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER. When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the following screen appears automatically. NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN • If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 4 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. 5 To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.92) in the “Option” menu. • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.41). 7 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 The adjusted speaker settings are applied. • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. En 40 Caution • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Checking the measurement results 3 HDMI 1 2 3 You can check the YPAO measurement results. 4 1 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Result” and press ENTER. Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments • You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.102) in the “Setup” menu, which displays the previous measurement results. When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments. NET PARTY ZONE 2 TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU The following screen appears. RADIO 1 In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto Setup”, and then “Result” (p.101). 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press ENTER. 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 ON SCREEN 2 OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY To finish checking the results and return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 BAND MODE TUNING 1 Measurement result items PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 2 Measurement result details ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 The number of measured positions (when multi measure is performed) * RX-V779 only 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item. Wiring Polarity of each speaker Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Size Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the subwoofer) Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker Level Output level adjustment for each speaker En 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Error message Cause E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected. E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the presence speakers cannot be detected. E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker. E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. E-6: Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers are connected. Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers. E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”. An internal error has occurred. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-10: Internal Error Remedy Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. En 42 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. Warning message Cause Remedy W-1: Out of Phase A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.41) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly: Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable. If the speaker is connected correctly: Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message. W-2: Over Distance A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.41) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. W-3: Level Error There are significant volume differences between the speakers. Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. En 43 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly ■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. Connect a mobile device to the unit directly. You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit. Selecting the connection method Select a connection method according to your network environment. ■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point). You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the unit. Mobile device (such as iPhone) Internet The unit For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.51). Wireless router • You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.32) or the wireless network connection (p.45). Modem • When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available. – Internet radio – Network services – Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS) Mobile device (such as iPhone) The unit • For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website. For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.45). • You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.32) or Wireless Direct (p.51). • If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other. En 44 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z Connecting the unit to a wireless network HDMI 1 2 3 There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network. 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 Select a connection method according to your environment. Do you own iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch)? HDMI OUT Yes 6 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”. A (p.45) SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU No RADIO Does your wireless router (access point) have a WPS button? VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN No Cursor keys ENTER RETURN B (p.47) ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER Yes C (p.48) • The checkmark indicates the current setting. DISPLAY BAND ■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch). Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a wireless router. 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. En 45 8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 9 HDMI 1 2 3 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the desired connection method and select “NEXT”. V-AUX 5 ❑ Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly If you select “Wireless (WAC)” as the connection method, perform the network setting sharing operation on your iOS device. (The following procedure is a setup example for iOS 8.) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB 1 NET PARTY ZONE 2 On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in the Wi-Fi screen. HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE RADIO VOLUME The following connection methods are available. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Wireless (WAC) You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device to the unit using a wireless connection. For details, see “Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly”. (You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later.) USB Cable You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device to the unit using a USB cable. For details, see “Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable”. (You need iOS device with iOS 5 or later.) OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT The name of the unit 2 Check the network currently selected and tap “Next”. Tap here to start setup 4 The network currently selected When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to the selected network (access point). En 46 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ❑ Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable z HDMI 1 2 3 4 If you select “USB Cable” as the connection method, follow the procedure below to share the iOS device setting with the unit. V-AUX 5 1 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB The unit (front) HDMI OUT SCENE TV RADIO HDMI IN PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 1 2 VIDEO AUX NET 5V 1A VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS button. • This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method. NET PARTY ZONE 2 BD DVD Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable the screen lock on the iOS device. ■ B: Using the WPS push button configuration Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and press ENTER. 3 Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS device. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds. “Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display. ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. 4 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 47 3 Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access point). When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the front display. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 ■ C: Using other connection methods If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push button configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the wireless network settings. 1 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. OPTION RETURN 0 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the desired connection method and select “NEXT”. RADIO VOLUME ON SCREEN 8 WPS Button You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions displayed on the TV screen. Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS) See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.45). Access Point Scan You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an access point” (p.49). Manual Setting You can set up a wireless connection by entering the required information (such as SSID) manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless connection manually” (p.49). PIN Code You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The method is available if the wireless router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings, see “Using the PIN code” (p.50). Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. 4 7 The following connection methods are available. Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”. About WPS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. • The checkmark indicates the current setting. En 48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 ❑ Searching for an access point ❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB 1 NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 1 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the access point and select “NEXT”. 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the security method of the access point and select “NEXT”. The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. SCENE BD DVD Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired access point and select “NEXT”. You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and security key for your network. 2 RADIO Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 3 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Settings None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode En 49 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 HDMI 1 2 3 4 If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available. Proceed to Step 4. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB HDMI OUT If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU ❑ Using the PIN code If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. 1 If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26 hexadecimal digits. NET PARTY ZONE 2 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. RADIO The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen. 2 POP-UP/MENU 3 ON SCREEN OPTION RETURN Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless router (access point). VOLUME ON SCREEN Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired access point and select “NEXT”. DISPLAY If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. 4 If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1. 5 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 50 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z HDMI 1 2 3 4 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO 1 2 VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless Direct” and select “OK”. • Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected to the unit without permission. HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD 7 Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. V-AUX 5 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) ON SCREEN Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • The checkmark indicates the current setting. OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the desired security method and select “NEXT”. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Settings None, WPA2-PSK (AES) • If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted. En 51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 9 HDMI 1 2 3 4 If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available. Proceed to Step 10. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. Otherwise, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. HDMI OUT TV NET For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the instruction manual of the mobile device. a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device. b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available access points. c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key displayed in Step 10. SCENE BD DVD 11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device. RADIO 12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press ENTER to save the setting. The settings made appear on the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 The SSID and security key information is required for setup of a mobile device. En 52 PLAYBACK HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 AV 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET 1 MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 Input selection keys Basic playback procedure 1 HDMI OUT HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN MUTE VOLUME 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. ON SCREEN For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.61) BAND MODE TUNING • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.70) SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 MEMORY ENT 9 0 b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and press ENTER. Selecting an HDMI output jack 1 Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack. Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for signal output changes. VOL. • Playing back iPod music (p.67) MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO a Press ON SCREEN. • Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.66) PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE On-screen input selection Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. OPTION ENTER Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player) connected to the unit. 4 HDMI OUT 1 • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.73) HDMI OUT 1+2 (RX-V779 only) Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks. • Listening to Internet radio (p.77) HDMI OUT 1 Output the signals at the HDMI OUT 1 (RX-V779) or HDMI OUT (RX-V679) jack. HDMI OUT 2 (RX-V779 only) Output the signals at the HDMI OUT 2 jack. HDMI OUT Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks. • Playing back music with AirPlay (p.80) 4 L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. • To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. • To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE CONTROL on the front panel (p.92). (RX-V779 only) • You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.54). • When “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.) En 53 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) HDMI 1 2 3 4 The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI output jack (RX-V779 only) with just one touch. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 1 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN SCENE Press SCENE. BD DVD TV NET RADIO Input HDMI 1 AV 4 NET RADIO TUNER Sound program MOVIE (Sci-Fi) STRAIGHT MUSIC (7ch Stereo) MUSIC (7ch Stereo) SCENE BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Compressed Music Enhancer HDMI output jack (RX-V779 only) Off On On On HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1+2 Perform the following operations to prepare the settings you want to assign to a scene. • Select an input source (p.53) • Select a sound program (p.55) • Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60) By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. ENTER DISPLAY 1 The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. OPTION RETURN Configuring scene assignments • (RX-V779 only) Selecting an HDMI output jack (p.53) 2 Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. VOL. SET Complete L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR • You can also configure scene assignments in the “Scene” menu (p.96). • The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.97) in the “Scene” menu. • (RX-V779 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only) To control your playback device after selecting a scene with the remote control of the unit, change the external device assigned to the SCENE keys. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” in the supplied CD-ROM. En 54 Selecting the sound mode HDMI 1 2 3 4 The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB NET PARTY ZONE 2 ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies HDMI OUT TV NET MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN PROGRAM ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder and press ENTER. • You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the “DSP Program” menu (p.98). • Press MUSIC repeatedly. • When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decode mode (p.59) is automatically selected. This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening music sources or stereo playback (p.57). ❑ Selecting a surround decoder BAND TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 MOVIE MUSIC SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing PROGRAM. ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback DISPLAY MODE MOVIE b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER. RADIO This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.56). PROGRAM a Press ON SCREEN. • Press MOVIE repeatedly. SCENE BD DVD On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection • Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources (p.59). ❑ Switching to the straight decode mode • Press STRAIGHT. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels (p.59). ❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode • Press PURE DIRECT. This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the electrical noise from other circuitry (p.60). ❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer • Press ENHANCER. This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and breadth (p.60). En 55 • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.11) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in the “Information” menu (p.118). ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. ❑ MOVIE THEATER The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields. Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. Mono Movie This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. Sound program category “CINEMA DSP” lights up VOL. Hall in Vienna FPL L C R FPR SL SW SR Sound program • To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”. • We recommend using presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic sound fields. However, even when no presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields. • If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. • When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. En 56 ■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback (MUSIC) ❑ ENTERTAINMENT Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. You can also select stereo playback. ❑ CLASSICAL Hall in Munich This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. ❑ LIVE/CLUB Cellar Club This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. ❑ STEREO 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. • CINEMA DSP 3D (p.56) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.58) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is selected. En 57 ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field. • When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. ■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the front (p.19) and enjoy multichannel surround sound using Virtual CINEMA FRONT. When “Layout (Surround)” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front. • When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. ■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. En 58 Enjoying unprocessed playback HDMI 1 2 3 You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 ■ Playing back in original channels (straight decode) HDMI OUT When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Press STRAIGHT. Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. OPTION ENTER VOL. RETURN STRAIGHT DISPLAY BAND INFO SLEEP • For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.134). 1 Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder. Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes. VOL. †‡PLƒx MOVIE bPLIIx Movie bPLII Movie SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC • Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system and the selected decode type (p.99). SUR.DECODE PRESET MOVIE The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR MODE TUNING ■ Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel (surround decoder) STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used, select a surround decoder (p.59) • If “Layout (Surround)” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.58) works when multichannel source is played back. bPLIIx Music bPLII Music bPLIIx Game bPLII Game L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers even when 2-channel source is input. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers even when 2-channel source is input. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers even when 2-channel source is input. Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers. Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers. • You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are connected or when “Surround Back” in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”. En 59 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) HDMI 1 2 3 When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB 1 NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is enabled or disabled. SCENE BD DVD TV NET Press PURE DIRECT. RADIO MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME PURE DIRECT L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. 1 VOL. PROGRAM Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) “ENHANCER” lights up OPTION • When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. ENTER – Some settings for the speakers or sound programs ENHANCER VOL. RETURN – Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu DISPLAY – Using the multi-zone function BAND MODE TUNING MUSIC INFO SLEEP L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR – Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation) PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Enhancer On • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER • You can also use “Enhancer” (p.93) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. En 60 Listening to FM/AM radio HDMI 1 2 3 4 You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 TUNER HDMI OUT • The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. RADIO • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. SCENE BD DVD TV NET Selecting a frequency for reception 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM). VOL. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU Setting the frequency steps VOLUME ON SCREEN At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND BAND MODE TUNING PRESET TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY ENT 1 2 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 0 FM 87.50MHz (Asia and General models only) POP-UP/MENU 3 Use the following keys to set a frequency. TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). Set the unit to standby mode. When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z STEREO TUNED VOL. FM 98.50MHz L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. Numeric keys “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. PROGRAM 3 • “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range. STRAIGHT Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”. • You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.93) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. TUFM50/AM9 4 5 Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. En 61 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) HDMI 1 2 3 You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 TV NET • You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using “Auto Preset” (p.65). HDMI OUT MUTE 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. ■ Registering a radio station RADIO Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. PROGRAM Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. TUNER SCENE BD DVD ■ Selecting a preset station VOLUME STEREO TUNED VOL. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.61) to tune into the desired radio station. 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY ENT STEREO TUNED VOL. 9 01:FM 98.50MHz 0 Numeric keys MEMORY 01:FM 98.50MHz L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR Preset number • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. STEREO TUNED VOL. 02:Empty L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered En 62 • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. • To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.65). Radio Data System tuning • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. HDMI 1 2 3 (U.K. and Europe models only) 4 Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 MEMORY ENT 0 • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.65). 2 Press INFO. When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. 1 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. ■ Receiving traffic information automatically ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL Program Type 4 • To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed. SLEEP MUTE VOL. ECO INFO SBL • To cancel the search, press RETURN. SBR • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. Item name About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. CHARGE OUT ENHANCER STEREO TUNED CHARGE OUT ECO SLEEP MUTE CLASSICS ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL SBL SLEEP MUTE VOL. TP FM101.30MHz VOL. ECO ENHANCER STEREO TUNED SBR ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL SBL SBR Traffic information station (frequency) Information Program Service Program service name • “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name Frequency Frequency En 63 Operating the radio on the TV HDMI 1 2 3 You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV. 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB TUNER NET PARTY ZONE 2 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE ■ Playback screen RADIO 2 VOLUME 1 TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 3 Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 1 Radio station information Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (FM/AM) and frequency. (U.K. and Europe models only) When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.63), the Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed. 2 TUNED/STEREO indicators “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. En 64 ■ Browse screen HDMI 1 2 3 4 1 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 3 HDMI OUT 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Preset station list PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. 2 Preset number POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND 3 Operation menu Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Submenu Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. Auto Preset Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Utility 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto Preset”. En 65 Playing back music via Bluetooth HDMI 1 2 3 4 You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) on the unit. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB HDMI OUT The unit SCENE BD DVD TV Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit. BLUETOOTH NET PARTY ZONE 2 NET RADIO Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) • The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME • To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input source. 2 On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of the unit) from the available device list. OPTION • For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.136). ENTER RETURN A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be made. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 3 4 On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback. The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is displayed on the TV. • “Not found” appears when no Bluetooth devices are detected. • If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth connection. • To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations. – Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device. – Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit. – Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.103) in the “Setup” menu. • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. En 66 Playing back iPod music HDMI 1 2 3 4 You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start playback. USB NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET Playback of iPod content • For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.136). You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen. • The unit does not support a USB connection for iPad. To play back iPad music on the unit, use AirPlay (p.80). 1 RADIO Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU Connecting an iPod VOLUME Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 1 2 Connect the USB cable to the iPod. Connect the USB cable to the USB jack. MODE TUNING The unit (front) PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT STRAIGHT VIDEO AUX • If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT (CONNECT) 3 HDMI IN 5V 1A 2 4 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. VOL. Connected L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR • The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to charge without limit. • Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the simple play mode (p.69). En 67 ■ Browse screen HDMI 1 2 3 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB HDMI OUT 4 SCENE TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.69) and playback status (such as play/pause). OPTION 3 Contents list ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. BAND MODE Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.69) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Playback information 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN MOVIE 3 5 NET PARTY ZONE 2 BD DVD 1 2 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 ■ Playback screen Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down • You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback. Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. En 68 ■ Operating the iPod itself (simple play) HDMI 1 2 3 1 4 V-AUX 5 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again. USB NET PARTY ZONE 2 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod. Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode. The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are enabled. AV 1 TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU ■ Shuffle/repeat settings Operate your iPod itself to start playback. RADIO • During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below. 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Item BAND MODE MODE TUNING Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. PRESET Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Albums (Albums) Plays back albums in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v” appears in the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP Shuffle (Shuffle) ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 MEMORY ENT 9 0 4 Repeat (Repeat) 4 En 69 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Playing back music stored on a USB storage device HDMI 1 2 3 4 You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN • Connect a USB storage device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables. HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD • Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack. USB NET PARTY ZONE 2 The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format). OPTION • For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.136). Connecting a USB storage device 1 Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. The unit (front) ENTER Playback of USB storage device contents Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. RADIO RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE STRAIGHT TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE VIDEO AUX PRESET MUSIC (CONNECT) HDMI IN 5V 1A ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT USB storage device • If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. VOL. Connected L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR • If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display. En 70 2 HDMI 1 2 3 4 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ■ Browse screen 1 2 3 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. V-AUX 5 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 5 NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT 4 SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING 3 Contents list Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. 5 Operation menu PRESET Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE 4 Item number/total MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Menu Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down En 71 Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. ■ Playback screen HDMI 1 2 3 You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage device contents. 1 2 4 V-AUX 5 ■ Shuffle/repeat settings AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB 3 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME 2 Playback information POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND OPTION Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information. External device operation keys PRESET • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. MODE TUNING • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status (such as play/pause). Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Shuffle (Shuffle) Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Repeat (Repeat) • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. 4 En 72 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) ❑ For Windows Media Player 11 You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.32). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.119) in the “Information” menu. • The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network connection. • For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.136). 1 2 3 Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC. 4 Click “OK” to exit. Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”. Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click “Allow”. Media sharing setup • For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help. To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. ■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software installed ■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings. ❑ For Windows Media Player 12 1 2 3 4 Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC. 5 Click “OK” to exit. Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”. Click “Turn on media streaming”. Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name. En 73 Playback of PC music contents 3 HDMI 1 2 3 Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen. NET HDMI OUT 1 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP • If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 2 Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER. En 74 ■ Browse screen HDMI 1 2 3 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB 3 5 NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT 4 SCENE BD DVD 1 2 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 ■ Playback screen TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.76) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Playback information 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information. OPTION 3 Contents list ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total BAND MODE Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.76) and playback status (such as play/pause). Function 1 Page Up Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. • You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS). Return Returns to the higher-level list. • You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.96). Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 10 Pages Down En 75 ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC music content. HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB 1 When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE RADIO • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. VOLUME • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Shuffle (Shuffle) Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. En 76 Listening to Internet radio HDMI 1 2 3 4 You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. V-AUX 5 Playback of Internet radio AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 NET HDMI OUT • To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.32). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.119) in the “Information” menu. 1 The browse screen is displayed on the TV. • You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. SCENE BD DVD TV NET Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source. • The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service. RADIO • This service may be discontinued without notice. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 2 BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 4 • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. En 77 ■ Browse screen HDMI 1 2 3 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB 3 5 NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT 4 SCENE BD DVD 1 2 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 ■ Playback screen TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 2 List name 2 Playback information Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. OPTION ENTER 1 Playback indicator 3 Contents list POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 Playback indicator 4 Item number/total Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Menu Function Bookmark On Adds the current station to the “Bookmarks” folder (p.79). Bookmark On (Bookmark Off) Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from the “Bookmarks” folder (p.79). Browse Moves to the browse screen. Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 1 Page Up 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. • You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop playback. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. • Some information may not be available depending on the station. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. En 78 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) HDMI 1 2 3 By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”, you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the browse screen. 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB ■ Registering the station on the browse/playback screen NET PARTY ZONE 2 3 HDMI OUT Access the vTuner website (http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on your PC and enter the vTuner ID. You can switch the language. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO 1 Select the desired Internet radio station in the browse screen or start playback of it to display the playback screen. 2 Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On” and press ENTER. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN Enter the vTuner ID in this area. DISPLAY BAND • To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the “Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”. MODE TUNING PRESET • To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your account using your e-mail address. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ■ Registering the station on the vTuner website 1 Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit. This operation is necessary to register the radio station for the first time. 2 Check the vTuner ID of the unit. You can find the vTuner ID in “Network” (p.119) in the “Information” menu. En 79 4 Register your favorite radio stations. Click the “Add” icon (❤+) next to the station name. • To remove the station from the “Bookmarks” folder, select “Bookmarks” in the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (❤–) next to the station name. Playing back music with AirPlay Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network. iTunes Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit. PC (wired or wireless) 1 Router The unit Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the iPod. If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( iTunes (example) (wired or wireless) iPod iOS7/iOS8 (example) ) appears. iPod iOS6 (example) iPhone/iPad/ iPod touch • If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly. 2 • To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.119) in the “Information” menu. • When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device. iTunes (example) iPod (example) • For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.136). • You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay password (p.89). Network name of the unit 3 Select a song and start playback. The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. • The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. En 80 • You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. HDMI 1 2 3 4 • You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB • If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the iTunes/iPod stops automatically. • You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.96) in the “Input” menu to “Off”. NET PARTY ZONE 2 • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. HDMI OUT • To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers in advance. iTunes (example of English version) SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO Caution PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER ■ Playback screen 1 2 BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET Check this box SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 3 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 1 Playback indicator 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. En 81 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the unit is installed (Main zone) and in another room (Zone2). Preparing Zone2 For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (Main zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2). Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit. The connection method varies depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier). Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external amplifier. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Study room (Zone2) Living room (Main zone) • Analog audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and Bluetooth, USB, and network sources can be output to Zone2. To listen to the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to the AUDIO jacks (AV 5–6 or AUDIO 1–2 jacks) of the unit. The party mode (p.86) allows you to play back the same audio output in Main zone as Zone2, whatever the input audio signal type. En 82 ■ Using the unit’s internal amplifier ■ Using an external amplifier Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable. To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu to “7ch +1ZONE” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. The unit (rear) T HDMI OUT EXTRA SP ZONE2/F.PRESENCE HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 2 1 PTICAL The unit (rear) (BD/DVD) ARC UT ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 AM OAXIAL SPEAKERS AV3 CLASS 2 WIRING CABLAGE CLASSE 2 SURROUND CENTER FRONT Y SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP PR PB Y PB ZONE2 OUT jacks PR COMPONENT VIDEO AV2 MONITOR OUT PTICAL VIDEO SINGLE AV 1 VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE L R AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 SUR. BACK SU ZONE OUT External amplifier Audio input (analog stereo) ZONE 2 ZONE OUT 1 9 2 FL FR 3 L Q W R 1 4 2 AUDIO 5 9 6 3 7 Zone2 4 5 6 7 Main zone Zone2 • When Zone2 output is enabled (p.85), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound. En Main zone 83 ■ Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection) Remote connections between Yamaha products An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver. You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control supplied with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT jacks. REMOTE IN/OUT jacks • (RX-V779 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only) You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control if you register a remote control code for each device. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM. REMOTE IN/OUT jacks TRIGGER OUT 12V 0.1A HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDCP2.2 HDCP2.2 OUT1 REMOTE OPTICAL Yamaha products (up to six, including the unit) ANTENNA VIDEO (RADIO) FM (TV) AV4 AM COAXIAL AV3 Y PR PB Y PB PR AV2 MO OPTICAL AV 1 Remote control VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO AUDIO 2 AUDIO 1 REMOTE (BD/DVD) ARC OUT REMOTE OUT Infrared signal receiver HDCP2.2 2 IN OUT REMOTE IN HDMI OUT IN REMOTE IN/OUT jacks IN Zone2 ZONE 2 AV 5 AV 6 ZONE OUT The unit (rear) Infrared signal transmitter Infrared signal receiver External device (such as a CD player) Remote control (supplied with each device) Zone2 Main zone En 84 z Controlling Zone2 4 HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB NET PARTY ZONE 2 AV 5–6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET 1 2 HDMI OUT MAIN/ZONE2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE RADIO VOLUME MUTE VOLUME 3 Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”. Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. Press z (receiver power). For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or disabled. • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.61) When Zone2 output is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front display. • Playing back iPod music (p.67) Use the following keys to select an input source. AV 5–6: AV 5–6 (AUDIO) jacks TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN AUDIO: AUDIO 1–2 jacks (press repeatedly to select “AUDIO1” or “AUDIO2”) OPTION RETURN BLUETOOTH: Bluetooth connection (the unit as a Bluetooth receiver) DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING USB: USB jack (on the front panel) PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 MEMORY ENT 9 0 4 • Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.66) • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.70) • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.73) • Listening to Internet radio (p.77) • Playing back music with AirPlay (p.80) TUNER: FM/AM radio ENTER Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. NET: NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) PHONO: PHONO jacks (RX-V779 only [except for U.S.A. and Canada models]) • You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”. • The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display or web control (p.87) to control Zone2. • AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main zone. • To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP repeatedly. The Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of time. • To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE (when using the unit’s internal amplifier). When using an external amplifier, use the volume control on it. • The Zone 2 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input source selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone 2 input with the web control (p.87) or AV CONTROLLER (p.8). Caution • To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2. En 85 ■ Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode) HDMI 1 2 3 4 The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house party. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH MAIN USB NET PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT PARTY SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Press PARTY. Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front display. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION • If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default). ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 En 86 Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser. Web browser • You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.119) in the “Information” menu. • You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.89) to access the web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of the unit may change each time the unit is turned on. Web control (wired or wireless) PC • If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.112), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC, refer to its instruction manual. Web control (wired or wireless) Router • If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way. The unit – Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the screen. • By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.8). • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router. • Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these cases, configure the security software appropriately. • To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby mode, set “Network Standby” (p.89) to “On”. • We recommend using one of the following web browsers. – Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x – Safari 7.x 1 2 Start the web browser. Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser. (Example) En 87 ■ Top menu screen ■ Control screen 3 1 5 1 6 2 3 4 4 5 7 2 1 CONTROL 6 1 PLAY INFO Moves to the control screen for the selected zone. Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone. 2 STATUS 2 TOP MENU Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone. Moves to the top menu screen. 3 SETTINGS 3 SCENE Moves to the settings screen. Selects a scene for the selected zone. 4 PARTY MODE 4 POWER Turns on/off the party mode (p.86). Turns on/off the power for the selected zone. 5 SYSTEM POWER 5 VOLUME Turns on/off the power for all zones. Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the increments used for volume adjustment. 6 MAIN VOLUME 6 RELOAD Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the increments used for volume adjustment. Reloads the current status of the unit. 7 RELOAD Reloads the current status of the unit. • Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used. En 88 ■ Settings screen 2 BACK Moves to the top menu screen. 3 RELOAD Reloads the current status of the unit. 1 Note • If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit. • When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and other external devices. 2 • Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode. 3 • The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific information (such as MAC address and IP address). • Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit. 1 Rename Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.113) or the name of each zone (p.114). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. Network Selects the network connection method (p.111) or configures the network parameters (such as IP address) (p.111). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. AirPlay Password Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.80). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. MAC Filter Sets the MAC address filter (p.112) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. Auto Reload Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds. Network Standby Enables/disables the network standby function (p.112). Backup/Recovery Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup. Firmware Update Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update. Create Link Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen. Tips Displays tips for use of the web control. Licenses Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit. En 89 Viewing the current status HDMI 1 2 3 4 V-AUX 5 Switching information on the front display AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 Input source group Item NET RADIO Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) PHONO (RX-V779 only [except for U.S.A. and Canada models]) Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUNER 1 HDMI OUT Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO VOL. PROGRAM MUTE Audio Decoder VOLUME L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR * The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears. Item name TOP MENU About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION Viewing the status information on the TV ENTER VOL. RETURN DISPLAY †‡PLƒx MOVIE DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING 1 L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR The following information is displayed on the TV. Information PRESET Press DISPLAY. Compressed Music Enhancer status SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input source group. Input source group Item HDMI 1–5 V-AUX AV 1–6 AUDIO 1–2 Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUNER Bluetooth USB SERVER AirPlay * (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.63). Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) * During simple playback of iPod: Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) En 90 Input source/ Party mode status Volume/ YPAO Volume status Audio format/ Decoder Sound mode CINEMA DSP status 2 To close the information display, press DISPLAY. Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) Option menu items You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Press OPTION. • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. • Default settings are underlined. VOL. Tone Control L C R SL SW SR SBL SBR Front display Item Function Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds. 92 Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 92 Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. 92 YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.) YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume) Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Dialogue (Dialog) 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 4 Dialogue Level Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. (Dialog Lvl) 92 Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) 92 Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. Subwoofer Trim Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Subwoofer/Bass (SW.Trim) (Subwoofer/Bass) Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass. (Extra Bass) TV screen Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. En 91 93 93 Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 93 Video Processing (Video Process.) Enables/disables the video signal processing settings configured in the “Setup” menu. 93 Corrects volume differences between input sources. 93 Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 93 FM Mode (FM Mode) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. 93 Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) (U.K. and Europe models only) Automatically searches for a traffic information station. 63 Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.69), USB storage device (p.72), or media server (p.76). — Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.69), USB storage device (p.72), or media server (p.76). — Input Trim Input Settings (In.Trim) (Input Settings) Video Out (V.Out) To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Page ■ Tone Control (Tone Control) Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds. Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) Setting range -6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments Settings Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled. • If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. Adjusting with the front panel controls a Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass”. Output level b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. ■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume) Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC. On Off Volume: high Output level Volume: low Input level YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.) On Off Input level ■ Dialogue (Dialog) Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds. Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl) Settings Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume. On (On) Enables YPAO Volume. Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting. Setting range 0 to 3 Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) • YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already saved (p.36). Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting. • We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. • This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met. – One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when presence speakers are used. – Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.56) is working. (You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.) En 92 ■ Video Processing (Video Process.) Setting range 0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position) Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings configured in “Processing” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu. Settings Direct (Direct) Ideal position Disables the video signal processing. Processing (Processing) Enables the video signal processing. ■ Input Settings (Input Settings) Configures the input settings. ■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass) Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound. • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) Input Trim (In.Trim) Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Extra Bass (Extra Bass) Video Out (V.Out) Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the subwoofer. Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. Settings Settings Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass. On (On) Enables Extra Bass. Off (Off) Does not output video. HDMI 1–5 (HDMI1–5), AV 1–6 (AV1–6), Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. V-AUX (V-AUX) ■ Enhancer (Enhancer) ■ FM Mode (FM Mode) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60). Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. Settings • This setting is applied separately to each input source. • You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.60). Settings Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Default TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On) Others: Off (Off) En 93 Stereo (Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds. Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds. CONFIGURATIONS 4 Configuring input sources (Input menu) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can change the input source settings using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Input menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Default settings are underlined. The input source of the unit also changes. Item Function Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 95 Audio In Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. 95 Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 95 Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. 96 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 96 • You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. En 94 Page ■ Rename/Icon Select ■ Audio In Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases. Input sources HDMI 1–5, V-AUX, AV 1–6, AUDIO 1–2, USB, PHONO* • Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio output * RX-V779 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models) ■ Setup procedure 1 • Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo jacks (such as game consoles) Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w). Input sources HDMI 1–5, AV 1–2 ■ Setup procedure (To input audio through a digital optical jack) Select “AV1” or “AV4” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a digital optical cable. (To input audio through a digital coaxial jack) Select “AV2” or “AV3” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a digital coaxial cable. 2 3 4 • You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected. (To input audio through analog audio jacks) Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). Select “AV5”, “AV6”, “AUDIO1”, or “AUDIO2”, and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a stereo pin cable. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”. For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS”. Input sources HDMI 1–5, V-AUX, AV 1–4 Settings • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 5 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 95 Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal. DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.) ■ Volume Interlock Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.54) using the TV screen. Input sources AirPlay Settings Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod. Limited Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to 0 dB and mute). Full Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute). 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. ■ DMC Control Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. Input source SERVER Settings Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback. Enable Allows DMCs to control playback. • A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network. • You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. En 96 4 ■ Load Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments. Device Control Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback) Settings 5 6 Off Disables the SCENE link playback function. HDMI Control Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports HDMI Control. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Default SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO): Off Scene menu items Item Function Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. Page 97 Load Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can also configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments. 97 Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 98 Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 98 • To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.139). Detail Displays the assignments of the selected scene. ■ Save Registers the unit’s current settings (input source, sound program/surround decoder, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI output jack [RX-V779 only]) in the selected scene. • If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.54). En 97 Input Input source to be used HDMI Output (RX-V779 only) HDMI OUT jack to be used Mode Sound program/surround decoder to be used Enhancer Compressed Music Enhancer on/off ■ Rename/Icon Select Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (DSP Program menu) Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. ■ Setup procedure 1 2 3 You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV screen. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 5 • You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Reset Restores the default settings (p.54) for the selected scene. En 98 4 DSP Program menu items Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. • Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder. • Default settings are underlined. ■ Settings for sound programs Item Function Decode Type bPLIIx Movie (bPLII Movie), bPLIIx Music* (bPLII Music*), bPLIIx Selects a surround decoder to be used Game* (bPLII Game*), in combination with the selected sound Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music* program. (* Available only when “SURROUND DECODER” is selected) DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level. -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB Higher to enhance the sound field effect, and lower to reduce it. Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation. 1 ms to 99 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Surround Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. • To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”. 5 6 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 99 Surround Back Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation. Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field. Surround Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field. Surround Back Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field. Liveness Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field. Surround Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field. Surround Back Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field. Settings 1 ms to 49 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. 0.1 to 2.0 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it. 0 to 10 Higher to enhance the reflectivity, and lower to reduce it. ■ Settings for decoders Item Function Settings Reverb Time Adjust the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. 1.0 s to 5.0 s Higher to enrich the reverberant sound and lower to have clear sound. Reverb Delay Reverb Level Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. 0 ms to 250 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. 0% to 100% Higher to strengthen the reverberant sound, and lower to weaken it. The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” or “Neo:6 Music”. Decode Type Function 2ch Stereo Selects whether to automatically bypass the DSP circuit when an analog audio source is played back. Direct Function Settings Panorama Adjusts the broadening effect of the front sound field. Off, On Select “On” to wrap front left/right channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 0 to 3 to 7 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. -3 to 0 to +3 Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0 Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). bPLIIx Music The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”. Sound program Item Item Settings Auto, Off Neo:6 Music Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0 to +5 Front / Rear Balance Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. -5 to 0 to +5 Higher to enhance the front side, and lower to enhance the rear side. Left / Right Balance Adjusts the left and right volume balance. -5 to 0 to +5 Higher to enhance the right side, and lower to enhance the left side. Height Balance Adjust the height volume balance using the presence speakers. 0 to 5 to 10 Higher to enhance the upside, and lower to enhance the downside. (The presence speakers do not produce sounds when “Height Balance” is set to “0”.) Monaural Mix Enables/disables monaural sound output. Off, On 7ch Stereo • Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used. En 100 4 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu. En 101 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Setup menu items Menu Item Function Page Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 36 Selects a speaker system. 104 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 104 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 104 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 104 Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 105 Front Presence Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected. 105 Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 105 Layout Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used. 105 Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 105 Auto Setup Power Amp Assign Configuration Speaker Manual Setup Lipsync Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 106 Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 106 Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 106 Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 107 Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 107 Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 107 Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 108 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 108 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 108 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 108 Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume is adjusted. 108 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 108 Adjustment Sound Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. 108 Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 109 HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 110 HDMI Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 111 Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 111 En 102 Menu Network Bluetooth Multi Zone Item Function Page Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 111 IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 111 Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 112 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 112 Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 113 Bluetooth Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions. 113 Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit. 66 Bluetooth Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). 113 Main Zone Set Audio Receive Zone2 Set Disconnect Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen. 114 Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 114 Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 114 Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen. 114 Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 114 Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 115 Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 115 Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 115 Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 115 Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 116 Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 116 Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 116 Party Mode Set Display Set Function Trigger Output ECO ECO Mode Language Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 117 Select an on-screen menu language. 117 En 103 Speaker (Manual Setup) Front Configures the speaker settings manually. Selects the size of the front speakers. Settings • Default settings are underlined. Large Select this option for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). • “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. ■ Power Amp Assign Settings Selects a speaker system. Large Select this option for large speakers. The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). None Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations are possible using the presence speakers, Zone2 speakers, or bi-amp connection. Settings Basic Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using Zone2 speakers or a bi-amp connection). 7ch +1ZONE Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers (p.83) in addition to the speaker system in the main zone. 5ch BI-AMP Select this option when you connect front speakers that support bi-amp connections (p.23). Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. Settings ■ Configuration Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. • When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”). En 104 Large Select this option for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). None Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. Surround Back Subwoofer Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes. Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. Settings Settings Large x1 Select this option when one large speaker is connected. The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Large x2 Select this option when two large speakers are connected. The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Small x1 Select this option when one small speaker is connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). Small x2 Select this option when two small speakers are connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). None Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected. The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio. Normal Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Reverse Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Use None Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. • When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. Layout Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used. Choices Surround • This setting is not available in the following cases: –“Power Amp Assign” is set to “5ch BI-AMP” Settings –“Surround” is set to “None” –“Layout (Surround)” is set to “Front” Front Presence Rear Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of the room. Front Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.58) works in this case. Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected. Settings Use Select this option when presence speakers are connected. None Select this option when no presence speakers are connected. • This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”. Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers • This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “5ch BI-AMP” or “7ch +1ZONE”. Settings 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz • If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and crossover frequency to maximum. En 105 ■ Distance ■ Manual equalizer adjustment Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. 1 2 3 Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen. Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER. • To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”. Setting range 0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments • To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.36) to the “Manual” fields for fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type. 4 ■ Level Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer Setting range -10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) ■ Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. Setting range Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB Settings Manual 5 Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics. YPAO:Front Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front speakers. YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound. Through Does not use the equalizer. To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER repeatedly to select an item. Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Setting range Center frequency: 31.3 HZ to 16.0 kHz Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080 6 • “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have already been saved (p.36). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results. En 106 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Test Tone Sound Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. Configures the audio output settings. Settings Off Does not output test tones. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. ■ Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. Choices HDMI 1–5, AV 1–6, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–2 Settings Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Enable Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. Setting range Auto Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. • Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”. En 107 ■ Adaptive DSP Level Adjustment Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume is adjusted. Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”. Settings Setting range 0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments) Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Settings Settings Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. Minimum/Auto Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. Adjusts the effect level automatically. Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.56). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo). ■ Dynamic Range Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Does not adjust the effect level automatically. On ■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode • “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment. Maximum Off Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D. On Enables CINEMA DSP 3D. ■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back speakers are connected. Settings ■ Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Off Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS). On Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS). Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB • VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back. ■ Initial Volume Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on. Settings Off Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.) En 108 Video Aspect Configures the video output settings. Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through Does not convert the aspect ratio. 16:9 Normal Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the screen. • This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals. ■ Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). Settings Direct Disables the video signal processing. Processing Enables the video signal processing. Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce video output delay. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not displayed on the TV screen. Resolution Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through Does not convert the resolution. Auto Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution. 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 4K Output video signals with a selected resolution. (Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.) • If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MON.CHK” (p.121) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV normally.) En 109 HDMI ARC Configures the HDMI settings. Enables/disables ARC (p.140) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Off Disables ARC. On Enables ARC. • You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. Standby Sync ■ HDMI Control Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.139). Settings Settings Off Disables HDMI Control. Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Enables HDMI Control. Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”. Auto Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. • To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.139) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. Settings AV 1–6, AUDIO 1–2 Default AV 4 • When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. En 110 ■ Audio Output Network Selects a device to output audio. Configures the network settings. • This setting (except for “HDMI OUT2” [RX-V779 only]) is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. Amp Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the speakers. On Enables the audio output from the speakers. ■ Network Connection HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2 (RX-V779 only) HDMI OUT (TV) (RX-V679 only) Selects the network connection method. Settings Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. ■ Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys (HDMI 1–5, V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks). Wired Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a commercially-available network cable (p.32) Wireless (Wi-Fi) Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.45). Wireless Direct Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.51). ■ IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). Settings DHCP Off (This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.) Does not output videos/audio to the TV. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Auto Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is set to the power saving mode. Select whether to use a DHCP server. Settings En 111 Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”. On Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such as IP address). ■ MAC Address Filter ■ Manual network settings 1 2 Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. Set “DHCP” to “Off”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER. IP Address Specifies an IP address. Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. Filter Enables/disables the MAC address filter. Settings Off Disables the MAC address filter. On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit. • AirPlay (p.80) and DMC (p.96) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter. To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4. MAC Address 1–10 To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Procedure ■ Network Standby Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). Settings Off Disables the network standby function. On Enables the network standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Auto Enables the network standby function. (If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.) En 112 1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10” and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 6 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Network Name Bluetooth Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. Configures the Bluetooth settings. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ Bluetooth Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.66). Settings Off Disables the Bluetooth function. On Enables the Bluetooth function. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 ■ Bluetooth Standby Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Settings Off Disables the Bluetooth standby function. On Enables the Bluetooth standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) • This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.112) is set to “Off”. En 113 ■ Zone2 Set Multi Zone Configures the Zone2 settings. Configures the multi zone settings. Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB • This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.104) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”. Initial Volume ■ Main Zone Set Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. Configures the main zone setting. Settings Zone Rename Off Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.) Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.104) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”. Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen. You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set” (p.114). ■ Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.86). Choice Target: Zone 2 Settings • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 114 Disable Disables switching to the party mode. Enable Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control. Function ■ Trigger Output Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. Sets the TRIGGER OUT jack to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input switching. Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. Settings Power The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone specified with “Target Zone.” Source The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone specified with “Target Zone.” An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.” Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission with “Manual.” ■ Display Set Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display. Dimmer (Front Display) Source Adjusts the brightness of the front display. Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”. Setting range -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) Choices HDMI 1–5, AV 1–6, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–2, TUNER, PHONO*, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB * RX-V779 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models) • The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.117) is set to “On”. Settings Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source specified in this option. High Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in this option. Settings On Displays short messages on the TV screen. Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen. Manual Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack. Wallpaper Choices Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. Settings Piano Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video signal. Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal. En 115 Low Stops the electronic signal transmission. High Transmits the electronic signal. Target Zone ECO Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. Configures the power supply settings. Settings Main When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone. Zone2 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2. All When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2. ■ Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode. ■ Memory Guard Settings Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. 20 Minutes Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and no input signals are detected for 20 minutes. 2 Hours, 4 Hours, 8 Hours, 12 Hours Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours. Settings Off Does not protect the settings. On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. Default U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes Other models: Off • When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen. Icon • Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. En 116 ■ ECO Mode Language Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode. Select an on-screen menu language. When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption. Settings Off Disables the eco mode. On Enables the eco mode. • The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted. • When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark. • If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”. Settings English English 日本語 Japanese Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Russian Italiano Italian Chinese • The information on the front display is provided in English only. En 117 Types of information Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) ■ Audio Signal You can view information about the unit using the TV screen. 1 2 Displays information about the current audio signal. Press ON SCREEN. Format Audio format of the input signal Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER. Channel The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE) For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE). Input Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal Dialogue Output 3 The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal The speaker terminals from which signals are output • Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the specifications and settings of the playback device. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type. ■ Video Signal Displays information about the current video signal. HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI) Analog Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT jacks (analog) ■ HDMI Monitor 4 Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Interface TV interface Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV • (RX-V779 only) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”. En 118 ■ Network ■ System Displays the network information on the unit. Displays the system information on the unit. (When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection) Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.120) IP address TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.121) Subnet Mask Subnet mask Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.120) Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway Tuner Freq. Step (Asia and General models only) The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.121) DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server System ID System ID number DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit IP Address MAC Address (Ethernet) MAC address MAC Address (Wi-Fi) vTuner ID vTuner ID Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection SSID (When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection) The SSID of the wireless network • If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.123). ■ Multi Zone Displays information about Zone2. (When using Wireless Direct) SSID The SSID of the wireless network Security Security method Security Key Security key IP Address IP address Subnet Mask Subnet mask MAC Address (Wi-Fi) MAC address Network Connection “Wireless Direct” indication En 119 Input The input source selected for Zone2 Volume The volume setting for Zone2 Item Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) Function Page UPDATE Updates the firmware. 122 VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 122 Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. 1 2 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) Set the unit to standby mode. While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. SP IMP.••8¬MIN MAIN ZONE z Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. Settings PROGRAM 3 4 5 STRAIGHT Press PROGRAM to select an item. Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. 6  MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 8  MIN Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit. Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. The new settings take effect. REMOTE ID••ID1 ADVANCED SETUP menu items Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. • Default settings are underlined. Item Function SP IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 120 REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 120 TU (Asia and General models only) Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 121 Settings ID1, ID2 Page TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 121 MON.CHK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 121 4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K signal format. 122 INIT Restores the default settings. 122 En ■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control 1 120 To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (BD/DVD) together for 3 seconds. To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (TV) together for 3 seconds. Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK) (Asia and General models only) TU••••FM50/AM9 MON.CHK••••YES Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region. The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.109) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different resolution than the detected resolution. Settings FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by 10-kHz steps. FM50/AM9 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by 9-kHz steps. Settings Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) TV FORMAT•NTSC YES Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution supported by the TV only.) SKIP Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.) • Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after “MON.CHK” has been set to “SKIP”. Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV. Settings NTSC, PAL Default U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC Other models: PAL En 121 Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) Updating the firmware (UPDATE) 4K MODE•MODE 2 UPDATE•••••USB Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit. New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. Settings MODE 1 MODE 2 Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 format. (4:2:0 format only for VIDEO AUX [HDMI IN] jack) Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”. ■ Firmware update procedure Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:2:0 format. 1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware update. Choices • When “MODE 1” is selected, use a high-speed HDMI cable that supports 18 Gbps. Restoring the default settings (INIT) USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. • If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.123). INIT••••CANCEL Restores the default settings for the unit. Checking the firmware version (VERSION) Choices VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations. ALL Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. VERSION••xx.xx Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. • You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.119) in the “Information” menu. • It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed. En 122 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network HDMI 1 2 3 4 New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it. V-AUX 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUDIO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE Note RADIO • Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed). TOP MENU • If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.122). VOLUME • If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.119). You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen. • For details on update, visit the Yamaha website. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN If “Update Success Please Power Off!” appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel. The firmware update is complete. HDMI OUT SCENE 3 OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.122). Information icon BAND A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 Message System Icon 1 2 Read the on-screen description. To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to select “START” and press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off. En 123 APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the speaker settings again (p.36). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.104). I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during operations... Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control... By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu to turn off the short messages. If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.108). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 (p.114). I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.116). I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning on the unit... The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.108). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 (p.114). When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.120). We are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources… You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.93). I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when the unit is in standby mode… I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at all... If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled. To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.139). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, En 124 Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power, system and remote control Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.22). The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used for the specified time. To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.116). The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.120). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.22). The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. En 125 Problem The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cause Remedy The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. (RX-V779 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only) The remote control is set to control external devices. Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in orange). The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.120). Cause Remedy Audio Problem No sound. Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.108). A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. The volume cannot be increased. The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.107). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.36) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.104). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.36) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.106). The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be malfunctioning. The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals. To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.107). Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.36) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.105). The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer. The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. No sound is coming from a specific speaker. No sound is coming from the subwoofer. En 126 Problem No sound from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. Cause Remedy The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.111). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.25). (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.110). (If you are trying to use ARC) ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.110). Also, enable ARC on the TV. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. Noise/hum is heard. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.117). A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. The sound is distorted. En 127 Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). Cause Remedy Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MON.CHK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.121). The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.141). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both the TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2. The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to other than the HDMI 1–3 jack. To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the playback device to the HDMI 1–3 jack (p.27). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.25). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. En 128 FM/AM radio Problem Cause Remedy There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception (p.93). FM radio reception is weak or noisy. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. Select the station manually (p.61). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. Select the station manually (p.61). The AM radio signal is weak. Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the supplied AM antenna. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.62). Auto Preset has been used. En 129 Bluetooth Problem A Bluetooth connection cannot be established. No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted during playback. Cause Remedy The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled. Enable the Bluetooth function (p.113). Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit. Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.66). The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. Move the unit away from those devices. The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP. Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP. The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not working for some reason. Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.66). The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device. The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit. The Bluetooth connection has been terminated. Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.66). The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. Move the unit away from those devices. Cause Remedy USB and network Problem The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on the unit (p.111). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.111). The unit does not detect the USB device. The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless router (access point). The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router. The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other. There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access point). Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no obstacles between them. En 130 Problem Cause Remedy Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might disturb the wireless communication. Turn off these devices. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless router (access point). Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point). The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.73). Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and the PC to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.112). The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.73). The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been stopped. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (such as the router). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number varies depending on the radio station. The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router. Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.112). It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.122). Wireless network is not found. The unit does not detect the PC. The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The Internet radio cannot be played. The iPod does not recognize the unit when using AirPlay. The application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit. Firmware update via the network is failed. En 131 Error indications on the front display Message Cause Remedy Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.73). Access error The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again. The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.67). Make sure your router and modem are turned on. There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.32). Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. No device The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again. Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on again. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.120). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reason. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.73). If the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again. Unable to play En 132 Ideal speaker layout Use this diagram as a guide. You do not need to adjust the speaker layout to the following diagram exactly. E R 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 1 9 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 2 9 3 Turn it slightly inward to reduce wall reflections. Turn it slightly inward to reduce wall reflections. 4 5 10° to 30° 10° to 30° 1 Front speaker (L) 2 Front speaker (R) 3 Center speaker 6 7 4 Surround speaker (L) 5 Surround speaker (R) 6 Surround back speaker (L) 7 Surround back speaker (R) 0.3 m (1 ft) or more E Presence speaker (L) R Presence speaker (R) 9 Subwoofer En 133 Glossary Audio information DTS-ES ■ Audio decoding format DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded. Dolby Digital DTS Express Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Digital EX DTS-HD High Resolution Audio Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD Master Audio Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Pro Logic IIx DTS Neo:6 Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources (for 2-channel sources only). DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. Dolby TrueHD FLAC Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. Dolby Pro Logic II MP3 One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448 MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. En 134 HDMI and video information Sampling frequency/Quantization bit Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. WAV Deep Color Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. WMA (Windows Media Audio) One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. HDCP HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of digital contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI). ■ Others HDMI A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference. HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel x.v.Color This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) Lip sync Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. Network information SSID SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark. WPS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. En 135 Yamaha technologies Supported devices and file formats CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) ■ Supported devices Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. ❑ Bluetooth device • The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP. • A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be compatible, depending on the model. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room. ❑ USB devices Compressed Music Enhancer • The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format. The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. • Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc. SILENT CINEMA • USB devices with encryption cannot be used. Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB storage device. Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. ❑ iPod Made for. Virtual CINEMA FRONT Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation) Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room. (as of April 2015) iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation) • An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software version of the iPod. Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed of CINEMA DSP. ❑ AirPlay AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion or later, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later. (as of April 2015) En 136 ■ File formats ❑ USB/PC (NAS) Sampling frequency (kHz) Quantization bitrate (bit) Bitrate The number of channels Gapless playback WAV * 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96/176.4/ 192 16/24 — 2 ✔ MP3 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 — WMA 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 — MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 — FLAC 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96/176.4/ 192 16/24 — 2 ✔ ALAC 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96 16/24 — 2 ✔ AIFF 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96/176.4/ 192 16/24 — 2 ✔ DSD 2.8 MHz/ 5.6 MHz 1 — 2 — File * Linear PCM format only • To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. En 137 Video signal flow Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. ■ Video conversion table • You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu. • The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably. HDMI out Video device The unit TV Resolution 480i/ 576i 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 4K 480i/576i m m m m m m m m m m m 720p m m m m 1080i m m m m 1080p/50, 60 Hz m m m m m m 480p/576p HDMI in HDMI out HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI in 1080p/24 Hz COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PR PB PB PB PB Y Y Y Y VIDEO VIDEO in VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO m 480i/576i m m m m m COMPONENT VIDEO PR COMPONENT VIDEO in VIDEO in 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 480i/ 576i m m 480p/576p m 720p m 1080i VIDEO 480i/ 576i m 4K COMPONENT VIDEO in VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO out m 480i/576i m m m m m m m: Available En 138 (Example) Information on HDMI HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. Turns on and displays video from the playback device Playback starts Press SCENE (BD/DVD) To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.25) and “Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.27). For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. Operations available from the TV’s remote control • Standby synchronization • This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. • Volume control including mute 1 2 • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Configure the settings of the unit. a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. b Press ON SCREEN. (Example) ON SCREEN OPTION HDMI Control HDMI Control ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER Playback device also turns off RETURN The unit turns off (standby) DISPLAY c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. Turn off the TV Operations available from the unit’s remote control • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.54) • Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed) • Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) using the external device operation keys En 139 d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”. Audio Return Channel (ARC) ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal to the TV. Check the following after the HDMI Control settings. 1 2 e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER. – “ARC” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. g Press ON SCREEN. 3 Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). 4 Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. – The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked “ARC”) on the TV. Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. • If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.27). Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. • “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.54), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV). Check the followings. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. 8 Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following: f Use the cursor keys to select “On”. 5 6 7 Select a TV program with the TV remote control. Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. • We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices. En 140 HDMI signal compatibility Audio signals Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example) 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Video signals The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. En 141 Trademarks Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. This receiver supports network connections. Google Noto Fonts For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. Windows™ Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. iTunes, AirPlay, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc. Android™ Google Play™ Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is under license. Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK) Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved. The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. En 142 Copyright © 2012 Google Inc. All rights reserved. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License. Explanations regarding GPL This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and redistribute this open-source code only. For information on GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website (http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/). Specifications Input jacks Output jacks Other jacks • Analog Audio • Analog Audio • YPAO MIC x 1 [RX-V779] [RX-V779] [U.S.A. and Canada models] - Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, • REMOTE IN x 1 Audio x 4 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2) SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R*1, EXTRA SP L/R*2) • REMOTE OUT x 1 [Other models] *1 Note: Assignment is possible [SURROUND BACK, • TRIGGER OUT x 1 Audio x 5 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2, PHONO) [RX-V679] Audio x 4 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2) • Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)] HDMI *2 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, PRESENCE] • HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC - Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD SURROUND BACK L/R) • Video Format (Repeater Mode) Optical x 2 (AV 1, AV 4) - Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono) Coaxial x 2 (AV 2–3) - ZONE2 OUT x 1 - VGA - Headphone x 1 - 480i/60 Hz [RX-V679] - 576i/50 Hz • Video Composite x 4 (AV 3–6) Component x 2 (AV 1–2) • HDMI Input HDMI x 6 (HDMI 1–5, V-AUX) • Other - 480p/60 Hz - Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R , EXTRA SP L/R ) - 576p/50 Hz *1 Note: Assignment is possible [SURROUND BACK, - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz *1 *2 - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)] *2 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, PRESENCE] USB x 1 (USB2.0) - Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono) NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) - ZONE2 OUT x 1 - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz - 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Audio Format - Headphone x 1 - Dolby TrueHD - Dolby Digital Plus • Video MONITOR OUT - Dolby Digital - Component x 1 - DTS-HD Master Audio - Composite x 1 - DTS-HD High Resolution Audio - DTS Express • HDMI Output - DTS [RX-V779] HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2) [RX-V679] - DSD 2-ch to 6-ch - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible HDMI OUT x 1 (HDMI 1–3: HDCP 2.2 compatible) • Link Function: CEC supported En 143 TUNER Compatible Decoding Formats • Analog Tuner • Decoding Format [RX-V779] [U.K. and Europe models] - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) - Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX [Other models] - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) USB • Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory - DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 - DTS Digital Surround - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, • Bluetooth Version................................................. Ver. 2.1+EDR • Supported Profile................................................ A2DP, AVRCP Center ....................................................................... 130 W/ch Surround Back L/R..................................................... 130 W/ch (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 ) [RX-V679] Bluetooth • Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device Front L/R..................................................................... 130 W/ch Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models].......................... 160 W/ch • Post Decoding Format - Dolby Pro Logic Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet) (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) Surround L/R .............................................................. 130 W/ch DTS Express • Current Supply Capacity: 1 A • Sink Function • Rated Output Power (1-channel driven) (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) Dolby Pro Logic II Game Front L/R..................................................................... 125 W/ch Center ....................................................................... 125 W/ch - Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema Audio Section Surround L/R .............................................................. 125 W/ch Surround Back L/R..................................................... 125 W/ch (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 ) Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models].......................... 150 W/ch • Rated Output Power (2-channel driven) • Maximum Effective Output Power (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ) • Supported Codec..................................................... SBC, AAC [RX-V779] [China, Korea, Asia and General models] • Wireless Output ............................................ Bluetooth Class 2 (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ) [RX-V779] Front L/R ................................................................. 95 W+95 W Front L/R..................................................................... 160 W/ch (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) Center ........................................................................ 160 W/ch Network [U.S.A. and Canada models] Surround L/R .............................................................. 160 W/ch • PC Client Function Front L/R ............................................................. 110 W+110 W Surround Back L/R..................................................... 160 W/ch Center..............................................................................110 W [RX-V679] Surround L/R ...................................................... 110 W+110 W Front L/R..................................................................... 150 W/ch Surround Back L/R ............................................. 110 W+110 W Center ........................................................................ 150 W/ch • Internet Radio [RX-V679] Surround L/R .............................................................. 150 W/ch • WiFi function (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ) Surround Back L/R..................................................... 150 W/ch • Maximum Communication Distance....................... 10 m (33 ft) • Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5 • AirPlay supported - Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method Front L/R ................................................................. 90 W+90 W - Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) [RX-V779] [U.S.A. and Canada models] Front L/R (8/6/4/2 ) .................................. 130/170/195/240 W - Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device Front L/R ............................................................. 105 W+105 W [RX-V679] - Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Center..............................................................................105 W and USB connection Mode - Radio Frequency Band: 2.4GHz Surround L/R ...................................................... 105 W+105 W Surround Back L/R ............................................. 105 W+105 W - Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n En 144 • Dynamic Power (IHF) Front L/R (8/6/4/2 ) .................................. 125/165/190/235 W • Damping Factor Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8  .............................100 or more • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) [RX-V779] [RX-V779] PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω) PHONO (Input Shorted 35 mV, Speaker Out [FRONT]) [Except for U.S.A. and Canada models] .............3.5 mV/47 kΩ [Except for U.S.A. and Canada models]............ 96 dB or more AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)..............................200 mV/47 kΩ AV 5 etc. (Pure Direct) (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out) [RX-V679] ......................................................................... 110 dB or more AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)..............................200 mV/47 kΩ [RX-V679] • Maximum Input Signal [RX-V779] PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) [Except for U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................ 60 mV AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ........................... 2.3 V Video Section • Video Signal Type ....................................... NTSC/PAL/SECAM AV 5 etc. (Pure Direct) (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out) ......................................................................... 110 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less • Video Signal Level Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω Component Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω Pb/Pr ................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω • Video Maximum Input Level........................... 1.5 Vp-p or more • Video Signal to Noise Ratio................................ 50 dB or more • Monitor Out Frequency Response Component ............................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB • Channel Separation [RX-V679] [RX-V779] AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ........................... 2.3 V FM Section PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) • Tuning Range • Output Level / Output Impedance [Except for U.S.A. and Canada models] [U.S.A. and Canada models].............. 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz [RX-V779] ................................................................ 60 dB/55 dB or more [Asia and General models] PRE OUT...................................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ AV 5 etc. (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ...................................... 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz SUBWOOFER ...........................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ ................................................................ 70 dB/50 dB or more [Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz ZONE2 OUT.......................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ [RX-V679] [RX-V679] AV 5 etc. (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) SUBWOOFER ...........................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ ................................................................ 70 dB/50 dB or more ZONE2 OUT.......................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ • Volume Control Range............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB • Frequency Response Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB • RIAA Equalization Deviation Mono ................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) • Headphone Impedance ...................................... 16 Ω or more AV 5 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ......................... +0/-3 dB • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) • Tone Control Characteristics Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz Mono ................................................................................65 dB Stereo...............................................................................64 dB • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) Mono ................................................................................. 0.5% Stereo................................................................................ 0.6% [RX-V779] Bass Turnover ............................................................... 350 Hz PHONO Treble Boost/Cut..........................±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz • Antenna Input................................................ 75 Ω unbalanced [Except for U.S.A. and Canada models] ....................0±0.5 dB Treble Turnover..............................................................3.5 kHz AM section • Total Harmonic Distortion • Filter Characteristics • Tuning Range [RX-V779] (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) [U.S.A. and Canada models]...................530 kHz to 1710 kHz PHONO to Speaker Out (FRONT) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back) ...... 12 dB/oct. [Asia and General models] ......530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz [Except for U.S.A. and Canada models] .............0.02% or less L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct. [Other models] .........................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz AV 5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ...............................0.06% or less [RX-V679] AV 5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ...............................0.06% or less En 145 General • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General model]............ AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model]................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models].............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz [Asia model] ................................... AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................................... 400 W • Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna upright) [RX-V779] [China model] .........................435 x 234 x 381 mm (17-1/8” x 9-1/4” x 15”) [Other models] .................. 435 x 234 x 379 mm (17-1/8” x 9-1/4” x 14-7/8”) [RX-V679] ..... 435 x 234 x 378 mm (17-1/8” x 9-1/4” x 14-7/8”) • Weight [RX-V779] ......................................................10.6 kg (23.4 lbs) [RX-V679] ......................................................10.0 kg (22.1 lbs) [China, Asia and General models] ................................. 270 W [Other models]................................................................ 300 W * Specifications are subject to change without notice. • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off.......................... 0.1 W HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals) ......................................................................................... 1.3 W Network Standby On Wired ............................................................................ 2.4 W Wi-Fi.............................................................................. 2.4 W Wireless Direct.............................................................. 2.5 W Bluetooth Standby On ..................................................... 2.3 W HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), Network Standby On (Wireless Direct) ............................ 3.1 W • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models]............................................. 590 W • Dimensions (W x H x D) [RX-V779] [China model] ......................... 435 x 171 x 381 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 15”) [Other models] ................... 435 x 171 x 379 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 14-7/8”) [RX-V679] ..... 435 x 171 x 378 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 14-7/8”) * Including legs and protrusions En 146 Index Symbols Exclamation mark (!) Lock icon (o) 116 E 119, 123 ECO 116 Error indication (front display) External power amplifier 33 Extra Bass 93 Numerics 2.1-channel system 2ch Stereo 57 4K Ultra HD 141 5.1-channel system 7.1-channel system 7ch Stereo 57 Network Standby 20 O 132 H Adaptive DRC 92 ADVANCED SETUP 120 AirPlay 80 AM radio 61 ARC (Audio Return Channel) 140 Audio Decoder (front display information) Auto Power Standby 116 Auto Preset (FM radio) 65 HDCP 27, 128, 135 HDMI output selection 53 HDMI signal compatibility 141 B Banana plug 22 Bluetooth 66 Bookmark 79 L Lipsync 135 M C CINEMA DSP 56 Compressed Music Enhancer 60 Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) Initial Volume 108, 114 Input (front display information) Input Trim 93 Internet radio 77 iPod content playback 67 36 D Decoder Off (front display information) 90 Dialogue 92, 118 Dimmer (Front Display) 115 DLNA 73 DMC (Digital Media Controller) 96 DSP Program (front display information) 90 MAC Address Filter 112 Max Volume 108, 114 Memory Guard 116 Menu language selection 35 Multiple room playback 82 MUTE 53, 85 N NAS content playback 74 Network Connection 111 Network information 119 Network Name 113 En 147 62 R Radio Data System tuning Remote control 14 Remote ID 120 Rename 95, 98, 113 Repeat 69, 72, 76 I 90 91 Parametric EQ 106 Party mode 86 Power Amp Assign 104 Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) Pure Direct 60 Firmware update 122, 123 FM radio 61 Frequency step setting 61, 121 Front display information 90 A Option menu P F 19 18, 21, 22 112 63 S 90 SCENE function 54 Setup menu 101 Short Message 115 Shuffle 69, 72, 76 Signal information 118 Sleep timer 14 Sound program 56, 57 Speaker impedance 17 Standby Through 111 Straight decode 59 Subwoofer Trim 93 Surround decoder 59 T Test Tone 107 Tone Control 92 Trigger function 33 U USB storage device content playback 70 V Video/audio input jack combination 28 Virtual CINEMA FRONT 58 Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) 108 W Wallpaper 115 Web control 87 Wired (Network Connection, Setup menu) Wireless (Wi-Fi) 45, 111 Wireless Direct 51, 111 WPS 47 111 Y YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) YPAO Volume 92 36 Z Zone2 82, 114 En 148 © 2015 Yamaha Corporation YH003A0/EN1